JP5950689B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that, when a lottery opportunity occurs during a game, displays a symbol in a manner that displays a result of a lottery after a symbol change display.

  As a conventional gaming machine, there is disclosed a gaming machine that executes a notice effect during a jackpot game based on already stored start prize information or start prize information generated during a jackpot (for example, Patent Document 1). . In this gaming machine, it is determined whether or not a probable big hit, a non-probable big hit, or a super reach occurs in a variation display executed after the end of the big hit game, and a notice effect based on the determination result is executed during the big hit game. The Specifically, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, during the jackpot game, a hammer image, a light emission mark image, and a cross mark image are displayed, thereby executing a notice effect for a variable display after the jackpot game ends. ing.

  For this reason, according to the technique of Patent Document 1, during the jackpot game, since it is foretold that the variable display in the high expectation display mode will be performed after the jackpot game ends, the next change after the jackpot game ends. It is considered that the player can have a sense of expectation in the display, and the effects during the big hit game can be varied.

  Also, as another prior art, there is a gaming machine that determines a jackpot type other than the two round probability variable jackpot at the time of starting winning prize, and executes a pre-announcement notice effect based on the winning judgment result in the jackpot gaming state Known (for example, Patent Document 2).

Specifically, in the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 2, the game control microcomputer determines whether or not a big hit or a small hit will be made at the time of starting winning, and determines the determination result of the big hit type. During the big hit game, the computer executes a pre-reading notice (a big hit notice notice effect) based on the winning determination result.
However, the production control microcomputer excludes the lottery elements that have been determined to be “suddenly probable big hits (2 rounds probable big hits)” and executes the pre-reading notice (predictive notice during the big hit). ing.

  As described above, according to the technique of Patent Document 2, a pre-reading notice (notice effect during a big hit) is executed except for those determined to be “suddenly probable big hit (2 rounds probable big hit)”. It is considered that the announcement effect during the big hit that is meaningless for the player can be eliminated and the interest in the game can be improved.

JP-A-2005-27750 JP 2011-19672 A

  The above-described prior art has an advantage in that a variety of pre-reading effects are executed during execution of a jackpot game, thereby widening the range of effects of the gaming machine and improving the interest of the player.

However, such a pre-reading effect is an effect that the effect control device executes as an integral part of the effect, so it is a passive effect for the player, and the player can only watch the pre-reading effect vaguely. Can not.
For this reason, the player cannot actively participate in the contents of the game, and there is a risk that the player will be bored with the performance.

Therefore, in order to make a player actively participate in a game, there is a gaming machine that employs a player participation type effect using an effect switching button, for example, accompanying such a pre-read effect.
However, since the final result is predetermined even if it is a player-participation type production, the final result is the same (the result does not change) even if the production switching button is pressed many times. It will occur.

For example, if it is assumed that there is a player-participation type effect in which the effect switching button is repeatedly hit and the feature is dropped, if it is determined that the feature will eventually drop, the effect switching button is smoothly hit. If you do, the feature will eventually fall, but the feature will eventually fall in the last revival effect, etc., without repeatedly hitting the effect switch button.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the accessory will not fall in the end, the accessory will not fall no matter how many times the effect switching button is pressed.

  In this way, since the final result of the player participation type production is determined from the beginning, there is a possibility that it will give the player a feeling that it is a “finished race” and that the game will be less interesting. is there. As a result, there is a possibility that the willingness to participate in the player participation type effect using the effect switching button may be reduced.

  Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a technique capable of reducing a sense that the player participation type production is a “finished race” and reducing a decrease in the willingness to participate in the player participation type production.

The present invention employs the following means for solving the above problems. In addition, the wording in the following brackets is an illustration to the last, and this invention is not limited to this.
Solution 1: The game machine of the present solution means an internal lottery execution means for executing an internal lottery related to a player's profit (for example, a profit that an operation opportunity of a variable winning device is generated) when a lottery opportunity occurs during the game. When the internal lottery is executed by the internal lottery execution means, after the symbols (including symbols visually recognized) are variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time, the internal lottery is executed according to the result of the internal lottery. A symbol display means for stopping and displaying (determining display) a symbol in a manner (for example, an aspect associated with winning in advance), and a variation pattern of a symbol variably displayed by the symbol display means includes a plurality of special variation patterns. Fluctuation pattern defining means for prescribing types of variation patterns, and the variation pattern defining means for executing symbol variation display by the symbol display means A variation pattern determining means for selectively determining any one of the plurality of types of the variation patterns defined more than the above, and a result in which the result of the internal lottery corresponds to winning, and the symbol display means represents the winning When the lottery trigger occurs before the start condition that allows the symbol display to start the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display unit, the special game executing unit that executes the special game triggered by the fact that is stopped and displayed, A lottery element acquisition unit for acquiring a lottery element for use in the internal lottery execution unit by the internal lottery execution unit, and a plurality of lots specified by the variation pattern defining unit accompanying the acquisition of the lottery element by the lottery element acquisition unit Fluctuation pattern determination element acquisition means for acquiring a fluctuation pattern determination element for determining which of the fluctuation patterns to select, and A storage unit that stores the lottery element acquired by the lottery element acquisition unit and the variation pattern determination element acquired by the variation pattern determination element acquisition unit in the order of acquisition, and the variation pattern determination element is newly stored by the storage unit. A variation pattern destination determination unit that determines in advance whether or not the special variation pattern is selected by the variation pattern determination unit using the new variation pattern determination element before the start condition is satisfied; A determination result that an operation input receiving means for receiving an operation input by a player, and a determination result that the previous determination result by the variation pattern destination determination means is selected by the variation pattern determination means is present. A special game by the special game execution means when the specific condition is satisfied. A player participation type effect executing means for executing a player participation type effect that outputs a result of success or failure using the operation input received by the operation input receiving means, and the player participation When a success result is output in the player participation type production by the type production execution means, at least after the special game by the special game execution means is completed, the design is displayed in a manner representing winning in the symbol variation display by the symbol display means And a special mode effect executing means for executing a special mode effect with a content that suggests that there is a possibility of being displayed in a stopped state.

A game by the gaming machine of the present invention proceeds, for example, along the flow shown below.
(1) When a lottery opportunity occurs during the game (a winning at the right start winning opening, a winning at the left starting winning opening), an internal lottery (special symbol lottery) is performed. For this reason, the player plays a game with the initial goal of generating a winning at the right start winning opening or the left starting winning opening serving as the lottery opportunity.

(2) When the internal lottery of (1) is executed, the symbol (special symbol) is variably displayed over a predetermined variation time, and the symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. It takes a certain amount of time (fluctuation time and stop display time) from the start of the symbol display to the stop display. Once the symbol display is started, the stop display is completed. The next lottery will not be held until

(3) Regarding the pattern variation pattern of (2) above, a plurality of types of variation patterns including special variation patterns are defined in advance. Here, the “special variation pattern” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is fixed regardless of the number of memories. For example, the “variable variation pattern after special reach” or the “special variation pattern” that is selected when shifting to a special mode. “Fluctuation pattern after reach” and so on.
(4) When starting the symbol variation display in (2) above, any one variation pattern is selectively determined from among the plurality of variation patterns defined in (3) above.

(5) The special game is executed when the result of the internal lottery in (1) corresponds to winning and the symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner representing winning in (2) above. The special game is a game to which a special condition (for example, a condition that the internal winning lottery and the symbol change are not performed and the variable winning device is continuously operated) is applied. The special game basically corresponds to a game such as a 16-round jackpot game, but also includes a jackpot game or the like that is a 16-round jackpot but can obtain substantially the same profit as the 10-round jackpot.

(6) If a lottery trigger occurs before the symbol start condition is satisfied (for example, the symbol is not changing and the previous change has occurred, the symbol stop display time has elapsed), (1) The lottery element (big hit decision random number) to be used for the internal lottery of) is acquired.

(7) Accompanying the acquisition of the lottery element according to (6) above, a variation pattern determining element (variation pattern determination) for determining which one of the plurality of variation patterns defined by (3) is selected. Random number) is acquired. The variation pattern determining element is an element that determines the variation display mode of the symbol (2).

(8) The lottery element acquired in (6) and the variation pattern determination element acquired in (7) are stored in the order of acquisition. However, a predetermined upper limit (for example, four per symbol) is provided for the number of memories, and the number of memories does not increase beyond this upper limit. Here, the lottery element and the variation pattern determination element may be stored in the same storage area or may be stored in different storage areas, but are stored in association with each other.

(9) When a variation pattern determining element is newly stored in (8) above, is the special variation pattern selected in (4) using the new variation pattern determining element before the start condition is satisfied? No is determined in advance. Thus, before the new lottery element is actually consumed, it is determined whether or not the special variation pattern is selected when the new lottery element is consumed.

(10) Operation input receiving means for receiving operation input (input information) by the player is provided. Various input means such as an effect switching button, a jog dial, a touch sensor, and a touch panel can be applied to the operation input receiving means.

(11) When the previous determination result according to (9) is a determination result that there is a lottery element in which the special variation pattern of (3) is selected, and a specific condition is satisfied (When the conditions such as the number of lottery elements stored, the contents of the big director effect, the winning symbol are satisfied), the operation input received by the operation input receiving means (10) above during the execution of the special game according to (5) above A player participation type effect that outputs the result of success or failure is executed.
For this reason, although the player participation type effect is executed, the “success result” or “failure result” is finally output (displayed) depending on the player participation. Become.

(12) When a successful result is output in the player participation type effect according to (11) above, the special mode effect is executed at least after the special game according to (5) is completed.
Here, the special mode effect is an effect of content suggesting that there is a possibility that the symbol may be stopped and displayed in a manner representing winning in the variation display of the symbol according to (2). The special mode effect may be started during the execution of the special game.

As described above, in the present solution, when the condition for executing the special mode effect is satisfied, the player participation type effect is executed first. The special mode effect is executed only when the “success result” is output in the player participation type effect. For this reason, even if the execution conditions for the special mode effect are satisfied, the special mode effect is not executed when the “failure result” is output in the player participation type effect.
Therefore, whether or not a special mode effect is executed depends on whether a player's participatory production results in success or failure results in participation in the player participatory production. Can increase motivation.

  If the player himself / herself performs a player participation type effect that has a position as a judgment effect whether or not the special mode effect is executed, and if the player does not participate in the player participation type effect, it is different from the special mode effect. By executing this mode effect (by replacing the special mode effect with another mode effect), it is possible to reduce the feeling that the player participation type effect is a “finished race”.

  In this regard, since the final result is predetermined in the case of the conventional player participation type production, the result is that the same mode is entered regardless of whether or not the production switching button is depressed. Become. On the other hand, in the present solution, since the player participation type effect plays a role of determining whether or not the special mode effect can be executed, it is possible to obtain a novel player participation type effect that has not existed before.

  Solving means 2: The gaming machine of the present solving means is that in the solving means 1, the player participation type effect executing means, when the lottery element and the variation pattern determining element are stored in a predetermined number or more in the storage means, The gaming machine is characterized in that the player participation type effect is executed assuming that the specific condition is satisfied.

  In this solving means, when a predetermined number or more (for example, 5 or more) of lottery elements and variation pattern determining elements are stored, the player participation type effect is executed as satisfying a specific condition.

  For this reason, according to the present solution, by setting a limit on the number of memories regarding the execution condition of the player participation type effect, it is possible to raise a hurdle whether or not the player participation type effect is executed, The value of player participation type production can be increased.

  Solving means 3: The gaming machine of the present solving means is a special game effect executing means for executing a special game effect corresponding to the special game when the special game is executed by the special game executing means in the solution means 1 or 2. And special special game effect execution means for executing a special special game effect different from the special game effect when the number of continuous executions of the special game executed by the special game execution means satisfies a prescribed condition, The player participation type effect executing means does not execute the player participation type effect as not satisfying the specific condition when the special special game effect is executed by the special special game effect execution means. It is a featured gaming machine.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) At the time of a special game, a special game effect (a big-game effect) corresponding to the special game is executed.
(2) If the number of consecutive executions of the special game satisfies the specified conditions (for example, the first big hit or the fifth big hit, etc.), the special special that is different from the special game effect in (1) above A game effect is executed. For example, in the case of the first big hit, an explanation effect of the internal state that shifts after the big hit game is completed is executed. Also, in the case of the big hit (5 consecutive villas), a special big role production to celebrate the consecutive villas is executed.
(3) When the special special game effect is executed according to (2) above, the player participation type effect is not executed on the assumption that the specific condition is not satisfied.

  Thus, according to this solution, when the special special game effect is executed, the player participatory effect is not executed, so that the special special game effect is given priority over the player participatory effect. Can do. Here, the special special game effect plays an important role to some extent because it is an effect executed at the milestone of the game. Therefore, by executing such a special special game effect in preference to the player participation type effect, the effect related to the game can be advanced more smoothly.

  Solution 4: The gaming machine of the present solution is a plurality of winning types including at least a specific winning type with respect to a winning result obtained by the internal lottery execution unit in the internal lottery executing unit in any of the solving units 1 to 3. When a winning result is obtained in the internal lottery by the winning type prescribing means and the internal lottery executing means, it is determined which of the plurality of winning types defined by the winning type prescribing means The player-participation-type production execution means is executed when the special game is executed in response to the decision that the winning-type determination means corresponds to the specific winning type, The gaming machine is characterized in that the player participation type effect is executed as satisfying a specific condition.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) With respect to the winning result obtained by the internal lottery, a plurality of winning types including at least a specific winning type (16 round probability variation symbol 1, 4 round probability variation symbol 1) are defined in advance.
(2) When a winning result is obtained in the internal lottery, it is determined which of the plurality of winning types defined in (1) above is applicable.
(3) When the special game is executed in response to the fact that it is determined that it falls under the specific winning type according to (2) above, the player participation type effect is executed assuming that the specific condition is satisfied.

  As described above, according to the present solution, it is a condition that the execution condition of the player participation type effect is determined to correspond to the specific winning type (16 round probability variation symbol 1, 4 round probability variation symbol 1). For this reason, unless it corresponds to the specific winning type, the player participation type effect is not executed, and as a result, the special mode effect is not executed. In this way, by adding that it corresponds to a specific winning type to the execution conditions of the player participation type production, the conditions under which the player participation type production is executed can be tightened, and the value of the special mode production can be increased. Can be increased.

  Solution 5: The gaming machine of the present solution further includes a plurality of production movable bodies capable of shifting from a collapsed state to a standing state in any one of the solution means 1 to 4, and the player participation type production execution When the means shifts the plurality of effect movable bodies to the standing state in order based on the operation input received by the operation input receiving means, and shifts to the state where all the effect movable bodies are standing A gaming machine that outputs the success result.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) A plurality of production movable bodies capable of shifting from a fallen state to a standing state are provided. For this reason, the movable body for production can shift from a fallen state to a standing state, or can transition from a standing state to a fallen state.
(2) Then, based on the operation input received by the operation input receiving means, the plurality of production movable bodies are shifted to the standing state in order (for example, standing one by one in order from the end), If all the movable bodies for production shift to a standing state, a success result is output.

  For this reason, according to the present solution, the success result is not output in the player participation type effect unless all the movable bodies for the effect are raised. This makes it difficult to improve the player's willingness to challenge the player participation type production. Further, by executing such effects during the big hit game, it is possible to attract the player's attention and avoid the situation where the big hit game is vaguely played.

  Solving means 6: The gaming machine of the present solving means is the solving means 5 wherein the player participation type effect executing means is configured to move all of the effects movable within the specific period of the special game executed by the special game executing means. The gaming machine is characterized in that when the body shifts to a standing state, the success result is output.

  In the gaming machine of the present solution, a successful result cannot be obtained unless all the movable bodies for production are erected within a specific period of the special game (for example, if it is 16 round big hit, between 6 and 8 rounds). . For this reason, the concentration power with respect to a player participatory type production can be raised by narrowing down the execution period of a player participatory type production to a fixed period.

  Solving means 7: The gaming machine of the present solving means is a lottery element according to any one of the solving means 1 to 6, wherein the special variation pattern is selected by the variation pattern determining means based on the previous determination result by the variation pattern destination determining means. If the specific condition is not satisfied, the special mode effect is not executed after the special game is completed by the special game executing means, and the variation pattern determining means The gaming machine further includes the variation special mode effect executing means for executing the special mode effect by the variation in which the special variation pattern is selected and the symbol variation display is performed.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) If the prior determination result is a determination result that there is a lottery element for which the special variation pattern is selected, but the specific condition is not satisfied, the player participation type effect is not executed. As long as the player participation type effect is not executed, the special mode effect is not executed after the end of the special game.
(2) However, since the prior determination result is a determination result that there is a lottery element for which the special variation pattern is selected, the special variation pattern will eventually be generated by accumulating the number of variations of the symbol. Will be selected. In this case, the special mode effect is executed with the change in which the special change pattern is selected and the change display of the symbol is executed.

  In this way, according to the present solution, even if the player participation type effect is not executed and the special mode effect is not executed, the special mode effect is executed with the change, so that the player is specially treated. There are no disadvantages. In addition, since the special mode effect is suddenly executed by the change, the player can be surprised and a new game can be exhibited.

  Solving means 8: The gaming machine of the present solving means is a lottery element according to any one of the solving means 1 to 6, wherein the special variation pattern is selected by the variation pattern determining means based on the previous determination result by the variation pattern destination determining means. Is the result of the determination that the player is present and the specific condition is satisfied, the failure result is output in the player participation type production by the player participation type production execution means. When the special game is executed by the special game executing means, the special mode effect is not executed, and the special change pattern is selected by the change pattern determining means and the change display of the symbol is executed. The game machine further comprises the variable special mode effect executing means for executing the special mode effect.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) When the prior determination result is a determination result indicating that there is a lottery element for which the special variation pattern is selected and the specific condition is satisfied, the player participation type effect is executed. Therefore, the player can participate in the player participation type production.
(2) However, if the player does not participate in the player participation type production, or if a failure result is output even if the player participates in the player participation type production, the special mode production is not executed after the special game is finished. .
(3) However, since the previous determination result is a determination result that there is a lottery element for which the special variation pattern is selected, the number of variations of the symbols accumulates. Will be selected. In this case, the special mode effect is executed with the change in which the special change pattern is selected and the change display of the symbol is executed.

  Thus, according to this solution, the player participation type effect is executed and the result of the failure is output, and even if the special mode effect is not executed, the special mode effect is executed with the change, There is no particular penalty for the player. In addition, since the special mode effect is suddenly executed by the change, the player can be surprised and a new game can be exhibited.

  Solving means 9: The gaming machine of the present solving means is the lottery element according to any one of the solving means 1 to 8, wherein the special variation pattern is selected by the variation pattern determining means based on the previous determination result by the variation pattern destination determining means. If the result is a determination result that the game does not exist and the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation input received by the operation input receiving unit is used during execution of the special game by the special game executing unit. The game machine further includes failure limited player participation type effect execution means for executing a failure limited player participation type effect for outputting the result of the failure.

In this solution, when the prior determination result is a determination result indicating that there is no lottery element for which the special variation pattern is selected and the predetermined condition is satisfied (the effect execution lottery is won) ), A failure-limited player participation type effect that outputs a failure result during execution of the special game is executed.
Here, if the previous determination result is a determination result that there is no lottery element for which the special variation pattern is selected, the player participation type effect is basically not executed. However, the player's expectation can be improved by appropriately executing such a failure-limited player participation type effect.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to reduce a decrease in the willingness to participate in the player participation type effect.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows a game board unit independently. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board unit about several places. It is a figure explaining the operation principle of the ball sorting device of the 1st structure example (1/2). It is a figure explaining the principle of operation of the ball sorter of the 1st structure example (2/2). It is the front view which showed independently the game board unit which has arrange | positioned the ball distribution apparatus of the 2nd structure example. It is the front view (A) and partial sectional view (B) which show the ball distribution device of the 2nd structural example independently. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of the ball distribution apparatus of the 2nd structural example in detail. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of the ball distribution apparatus of the 2nd structural example in detail. It is a perspective view which shows the flow-down aspect of the game ball in the ball distribution apparatus of the 2nd structure example. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement principle of the ball sorting apparatus of the 2nd structural example (1/2). It is a figure explaining the principle of operation of the ball sorter of the 2nd structure example (2/2). It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view (cross-sectional view which follows the XIV-XVI line in FIG. 13) which shows the internal structure of a ball distribution apparatus. 4 is a front view showing the periphery of a memory display unit 400. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the periphery of a memory display unit 400. FIG. 4 is a rear view showing the periphery of the memory display device unit 400. FIG. 4 is a rear view showing the periphery of the memory display device unit 400. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing the periphery of a memory display unit 400. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing the periphery of a memory display unit 400. FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the peripheral part of one movable body independently. It is a figure for demonstrating the detail of a cam gear and a cam part. It is a figure for demonstrating the detail of a cam gear and a cam part. It is a figure for demonstrating the detail of a cam gear and a cam part. It is a figure for demonstrating the detail of a cam gear and a cam part. It is a figure shown about the operation example of four movable bodies 41a-41d on the left side. It is a figure shown about the operation example of four movable bodies 41a-41d on the left side. It is a figure shown about the operation example of four movable bodies 41e-41h on the right side. It is a figure shown about the operation example of four movable bodies 41e-41h on the right side. It is a block diagram which shows the various electronic devices with which the pachinko machine was equipped. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an interruption management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a switch input event process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 2nd special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the production | presentation determination process at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a special symbol game process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol change pre-processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the change pattern selection table at the time of loss (normal mode and festival mode). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of a loss (fireworks mode). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table (night mode) at the time of loss. It is a figure explaining the variation time of the special symbol in a non-time shortening state. It is a figure which shows the structure row | line | column of the 1st special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structure column of the 2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (normal mode and festival mode). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (fireworks mode). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (night mode). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special symbol memory | storage area shift process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol stop display process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a mode management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a main control mode status update process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a variable winning apparatus management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big winning opening opening pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big prize opening / closing operation | movement process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big winning opening closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an end process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a mode setting process. 5 is a conceptual diagram showing a control method of the memory display unit 400. FIG. 5 is a conceptual diagram showing a control method of the memory display unit 400. FIG. It is a continuation figure showing an example of a production picture corresponding to change display and stop display of a special symbol. It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of reach production performed at the time of big hit (winning) in "16 round symbol" or "4 round symbol". FIG. 15 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big-bodied performance executed during a big hit game when a “16-round probability variable big hit” is met at the time of first hit (first big hit). FIG. 10 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big-acting effect executed during a big hit game when “16 rounds probable big hit” corresponds to a non-first win. It is a continuation figure which shows in part an example of the big role production performed during the big hit game when it corresponds to "16 rounds probable big hit" at the specific consecutive resort. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect of fireworks mode. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production performed at the time of winning in "2 round probability variation design", and the example of mode change production (1/2). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production performed at the time of winning in "2 round probability variation design", and the example of mode change production (2/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation of the memory | storage number display effect using the eight movable bodies 41a-41h and the memory display lamp 340 (1/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation of the memory | storage number display effect using the eight movable bodies 41a-41h and the memory display lamp 340 (2/2). It is a continuation figure shown about the example of production of the simultaneous movable production performed on condition that the total storage number has reached the regulation number (1/2). It is a continuation figure shown about the example of production of the simultaneous movable production performed on condition that the total storage number reached the regulation number (2/2). It is a continuation figure shown about the example of special reach production including the special movable production by a movable body (1/6). It is a continuation figure shown about the example of special reach production including the special movable production by a movable body (2/6). It is a continuation figure shown about the example of special reach production including the special movable production by a movable body (3/6). It is a continuation figure shown about the example of special reach production including the special movable production by a movable body (4/6). It is a continuous figure shown about the example of special reach production including the special movable production by a movable body (5/6). It is a continuation figure shown about the example of special reach production including the special movable production by a movable body (6/6). It is a continuation figure shown about a successful production example of special production performed during a big hit game (1/7). It is a continuation figure shown about a successful production example of special production performed during a big hit game (2/7). It is a continuation figure shown about a successful production example of special production performed during a big hit game (3/7). It is a continuation figure shown about a successful production example of special production performed during a big hit game (4/7). It is a continuation figure shown about a successful production example of special production performed during a big hit game (5/7). It is a continuation figure shown about the example of successful production of the special production performed during a big hit game (6/7). It is a continuation figure shown about a successful production example of special production performed during a big hit game (7/7). It is a continuation figure showing the example of a night mode production. It is a continuation figure showing an example of special reach production performed in the night mode. It is a continuation figure shown about an example of production when special production is not performed during a big hit game. It is a continuation figure shown about the example of failure production of the special production performed during a big hit game (1/2). It is a continuation figure shown about the example of failure production of the special production performed during a big hit game (2/2). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production of the change special mode production (1/2). It is a continuation figure showing the example of production of the change special mode production (2/2). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of simultaneous movable production | presentation management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an operation | movement memory production | presentation management process. It is a flowchart figure which shows the example of a procedure of the production | presentation selection process at the time of a working memory number increase. It is a flowchart figure which shows the example of a procedure of the production | presentation selection process at the time of working memory number reduction. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect design management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an effect design change pre-process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a mode production management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the fluctuation | variation effect pattern selection process at the time of loss. It is a variation production pattern selection table at the time of loss. It is a variation production pattern selection table at the time of 16 round big hit winning. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the flag setting process during special reach production. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a process at the time of a variable winning apparatus operation. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big hit effect selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of 16R big hit effect selection processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of 4R big hit effect selection processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of 16R big hit special effect setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a special effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a movable body effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of all the movable body stand-up success effect setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of all the movable body standing up failure production | presentation setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the process at the time of variable winning apparatus operation | movement completion | finish.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and a player borrows a game ball from a game hall operator to play a game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and a privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, a game ball acquired by the player Based on the number of games, it can be converted into a game value. The overall configuration of the gaming machine will be described below with reference to FIGS.

[Overall configuration of gaming machine]
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame assembly 2, a glass frame unit 4, a tray unit 6 and a plastic frame assembly 7 (game machine frame) as its main body. Among these, the outer frame assembly 2 is a structure in which wood is combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame assembly 2 uses fasteners such as screws for island facilities (not shown) in the game hall. Are fixed.

  The other glass frame unit 4, tray unit 6, and plastic frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame assembly 2, and these operate in an openable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). An opening / closing axis of a hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  A unified lock unit 9 is provided on the right edge (left edge in FIG. 2) of the plastic frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. Correspondingly, the glass frame unit 4 and the right edge (back side) of the outer frame assembly 2 are each provided with a locking tool (not shown). As shown in FIG. 1, in a state where the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame assembly 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side of the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly together with the locking device. 7 cannot be opened.

  A cylinder lock 6 a with a key hole is provided on the right edge of the tray unit 6. For example, when an administrator of a game hall inserts a dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates to open the glass frame unit 4 and the tray unit 6 together with the plastic frame assembly 7. It becomes a state. When these are entirely opened from the outer frame assembly 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

  On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the glass frame unit 4 is unlocked while the plastic frame assembly 7 remains locked, and the glass frame unit 4 can be opened. When the glass frame unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game hall can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. When the glass frame unit 4 is opened, the lock mechanism (not shown) of the tray unit 6 is exposed. If the lock mechanism is released in this state, the tray unit 6 can be opened to the front side with respect to the plastic frame assembly 7.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes a game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the plastic frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the glass frame unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the plastic frame assembly 7 with the glass frame unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. The glass frame unit 4 has a vertically oval window 4a formed at the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is attached in the window 4a. The glass unit is a combination of, for example, two transparent plates (glass plates) cut in accordance with the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the glass frame unit 4 in an openable / closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and this game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the glass frame unit 4 is closed, a space in which a game ball can flow down is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the game board surface.

  The saucer unit 6 has a shape projecting from the outer frame assembly 2 to the front side as a whole, and an upper dish 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to a player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. In the tray unit 6, a lower tray 6c is formed at the lower position of the upper tray 6b. The lower tray 6c stores game balls that are further paid out when the upper tray 6b is full. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (model connected to the CR unit), and the game balls borrowed by the player are separately received from the payout unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize balls. 6b or lower pan 6c).

  A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When a player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 degrees). (For example, 125) game balls are lent out. For this reason, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium put in the CR unit is displayed on this frequency display unit. The player can receive the return of the valuable medium with the remaining frequency by operating the return button 12. Although the CR machine is taken as an example in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the CR unit) different from the CR machine.

  In addition, an upper dish ball removal lever 6d is installed on the front surface of the tray unit 6 in front of the upper dish 6b in the upper position, and a lower dish ball removal button 6e in the center of the lower dish 6c. Is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c by sliding the upper plate ball removing lever 6d leftward, for example. Further, the player can, for example, push down the lower dish ball removal button 6e to drop the game balls stored in the lower dish 6c downward and discharge them. The discharged game ball is received by, for example, a ball receiving box (not shown).

  A grip unit 16 is installed at the lower right portion of the tray unit 6. The player operates the grip unit 16 to operate the launch control board set 174 and can launch (shoot) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises along the left edge of the game board unit 8, and is guided into an outer band (not shown) and thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the drawing) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown-in game balls flow down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill.

[Configuration of the front of the frame]
In the glass frame unit 4, glass frame top lamps 46 and 48 and glass frame side lamps 50 are installed at a plurality of locations so as to surround the glass unit (without reference numerals) as components for production. In addition, a tray lamp 52 is installed in the tray unit 6, and the tray lamp 52, the glass frame top lamps 46 and 48, and the glass frame side lamp 50 are integrally connected on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 in appearance. Designed as if it were.

  The various lamps 46 to 52 described above perform effects by, for example, light emission (lighting and blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, and the like) of built-in LEDs. In addition, a pair of left and right glass frame speakers 54 and a glass frame middle speaker 55 are built in the upper part of the glass frame unit 4, and a saucer speaker 56 is provided on the right side of the lower plate 6 c in the saucer unit 6. Built in. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (sound in general) and execute effects.

  In the center of the tray unit 6, an effect switching button 45 (operation input receiving means) is installed at a position in front of the upper tray 6b. The player operates the effect switching button 45 to switch the contents of the effect (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), for example, while the symbol is changing, during the big hit decision display, or during the big hit game It is possible to generate some effects (various notice effects, probable promotion effects, etc.).

[Configuration on the back side]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a dispensing device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a dispensing control board unit 176. A back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) constituting the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed. Electronic devices will be further described later based on another block diagram (FIG. 30).

  The payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference sign), and the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the plastic frame assembly 7. In this state, game balls replenished from a replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to a prize ball case through an upper prize ball basket (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

  The external terminal board 160 is an interface for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.). From the external terminal board 160, the game progress of the pachinko machine 1 is achieved. Various external information signals (for example, award ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start opening information, etc.) indicating the state and maintenance state are output to an external electronic device. Yes.

  The power cord 164 secures a power source (electric power) necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power source device (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of a game arcade. The ground wire 166 is also connected to a ground terminal installed in the island facility to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

[Configuration of the board]
FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. In the game area 8a, the start gate 20, the normal winning ports 22, 24, the right starting winning port 26 (first event generating means, first starting winning port), the variable start winning device 28, the variable winning device 30, and the ball distribution A device 200 or the like is installed. The game balls thrown into the game area 8a randomly pass through the start gate 20 or the ball distribution device 200 in the process of flowing down, or the normal winning ports 22, 24 and the right starting winning port. 26, winning (winning) the variable start winning device 28. The game balls that have passed through the start gate 20 continue to flow down in the game area 8a, but the winning game balls are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in the game board.

  The variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner), and accordingly, the left start winning port 28a (second event occurrence) Means, the second start winning opening) is facilitated (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, a pair of left and right movable pieces 28b, and these movable pieces 28b reciprocate in the left-right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. That is, as shown in the drawing, the left and right movable pieces 28b are in the closed position with the tip facing upward, and at this time, winning to the left start winning opening 28a is not facilitated (the opening width into which the game ball can flow is not large). Narrow state). At this time, winning is not facilitated, but the winning itself is possible. That is, an inflow path 28c and two obstacle nails (life nails) are arranged above the pair of left and right movable pieces 28b, and flows into the inflow path 28c from between the two obstruction nails (without reference numerals). The game ball can flow down in the inflow path 28c and win the left start winning port 28a.

  On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 is operated, the left and right movable pieces 28b are displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the opening width of the left start winning port 28a is expanded to the left and right. During this time, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state where the inflow of the game ball is facilitated, and the winning to the left start winning port 28a is easily generated as compared with the non-operating state. Regardless of whether it is inactive or inactive, the arrangement (gauge) of obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 basically flows down toward the variable start winning device 28. However, the game ball does not necessarily flow into the variable start winning device 28, and the inflow occurs randomly.

  Here, in the lower part of the ball discharge path 40f and the upper part of the variable start winning device 28 and the right start winning port 26, the ball distributing device 200 is arranged. Details and operation of the structure of the ball sorting apparatus 200 will be described later.

  In addition, the above variable winning device 30 operates when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode other than non-winning), and can be awarded to a big winning opening (no reference sign). (Special electric equipment, special winning event generation means). The variable winning device 30 is a device disposed on the left side of the upper end portion of the effect unit 40 (so-called upper attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a. The opening / closing member 30a is displaced from the closed position toward the open position by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the drawing, the opening / closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) with the tip facing upward (continuous with the effect unit 40), and at this time, winning in the grand prize opening is always impossible (big winning) The mouth is closed). When the variable winning device 30 is operated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced so as to fall to the left with the lower end edge portion serving as a hinge, thereby opening the large winning opening (open state). During this time, the variable winning device 30 is in a state in which the inflow of game balls is not impossible, and can generate an event of winning a prize winning opening. At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of the game ball to the special winning opening. The game balls that have won the big prize opening pass through the count switch 84 and are detected to win, and then are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the collection passage (without reference numerals).

  The game board unit 8 is provided with an effect unit 40 from the center position to the right side. The effect unit 40 has an upper edge portion 40a that functions as a guide member that changes the flow direction of the game ball, and includes various decorative parts (without reference numerals) on the inside thereof. The decorative part enhances the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by its three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a stunning operation by emitting transmitted light using, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images including an effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. In this way, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface (design of a cell plate (not shown)) and the decoration of the effect unit 40. When a transparent board (for example, an acrylic board) is used for the game board unit 8 instead of a veneer board, decorativeness by various decorative bodies (including a movable body and a light emitting body) disposed on the front and back of the transparent board is added. The A relatively large large lamp 57 is disposed on the upper right side of the liquid crystal display 42. The large lamp 57 is used as a one-shot notification lamp during a big hit or during a special symbol change.

  A ball guide passage (without reference numerals) is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed at the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage is opened obliquely upward to the left in the game area 8a. When a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide path, the ball guide path passes through the inside of the rolling stage 40e. Released on top. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface. Here, the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game ball that has rolled on the rolling stage 40e will eventually flow into the lower game area 8a. A ball discharge path 40f is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e. At this time, the game balls that have flowed down from the rolling stage 40e to the ball discharge path 40f are likely to flow into the ball sorting apparatus 200 directly below the ball discharging path 40f. . In addition, the production unit 40 may be accompanied by a drive source (eg, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) together with a production movable body (eg, a character figure, decoration, etc.). In addition to the effect using the image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter, the movable body for effect can execute the effect accompanied by the operation of the tangible object. Due to the effects using these movable bodies, it is possible to demonstrate appealing power different from the effects using two-dimensional images.

[Memory display unit]
A memory display device unit 400 is installed at the lower edge and the right edge of the effect unit 40. The memory display device unit 400 includes eight movable bodies 41a to 41h (production movable bodies). Among these, the left four movable bodies 41 a to 41 d are arranged in a row below the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The four movable bodies 41 e to 41 h on the right side are arranged in a row from the lower side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 toward the right side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

  The eight movable bodies 41a to 41h are members imitating mahjong tiles. The numbers “1” to “8” are attached to the upper surface of each movable body in a manner that is easily visible to the player. Each of the plurality of movable bodies has a built-in light-emitting device (LED) (not shown). By changing the lighting state (lighting color, lighting pattern), each movable body performs an effect operation by individual light emission. It can be performed.

  The eight movable bodies 41a to 41h can also be used as a movable body for production. Two motors for moving the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h are installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and these motors are used as a drive source by using a link mechanism, a gear transmission mechanism or the like (not shown). Each movable body can be moved. Note that a mechanism for operating the movable body and a specific rendering mode of the movable body will be described later.

  Further, the memory display unit 400 includes a memory display lamp 340. The memory display lamp 340 is disposed between the eight movable bodies 41 a to 41 h and the ball sorting apparatus 200. The memory display lamp 340 is composed of eight lamps, and each of the eight lamps incorporates a light emitting device (LED) (not shown), and changes its lighting state (lighting color, lighting pattern). The number of memories can be expressed.

In this embodiment, in the case of memory corresponding to the first special symbol, a light emitter (not shown) is caused to emit blue light, and in the case of memory corresponding to the second special symbol, a light emitter (not shown) is assumed to emit light in red. ing. When the memory of the first special symbol is increased by one, one memory display lamp 340 is lit, and even if the memory of the second special symbol is increased by one, one memory display lamp 340 is lit.
For example, when the number of stored special symbol lottery elements is “0”, none of the lamps is lit. When the number of memories of the lottery element of the first special symbol is increased by 1 from the state where the number of memories is “0”, the leftmost lamp is lit in blue, followed by the lottery element of the second special symbol. When the number of stored images increases by one, the second lamp from the left lights in red.

  In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8 a, and game balls that have not won a prize are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out port 32. In addition, all game balls that have been driven into the game area 8a, including the game balls won in the right start winning opening 26, the variable start winning device 28, and the variable winning device 30, are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8. . The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and further join a supply path of an island facility (not shown).

  Further, the game board unit 8 is provided with a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, for example, at the lower right position in the window 4a, and a first special symbol display device 34 (first symbol display means). , A second special symbol display device 35 (second symbol display means), a first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, a second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a, and a game state display device 38 are provided (normal symbol display means, Special symbol display means, lottery element storage means). Among these, the normal symbol display device 33, for example, turns on two lamps (LEDs) alternately to display the normal symbols variably, and stops and displays the normal symbols when the lamps are turned on or off. The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 memory numbers depending on, for example, a combination of turning off, lighting, or blinking of two lamps (LEDs).

  FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 at a plurality of locations (a lower right position in the window 4a and a position directly below the liquid crystal display 42). Among these, (A) in FIG. 4 shows an enlarged portion where the display of the gaming state including the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. FIG. 4B is an enlarged view of the above-described ball sorting apparatus 200 (first structural example).

  In FIG. 4, (A): First, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 can display the variation state and the stopped state of the special symbol by, for example, 7-segment LEDs (with dots), respectively. (Design display means). Further, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a have 0 to 4 each, for example, depending on a display mode constituted by a combination of extinction or lighting and blinking of two lamps (LED). Is stored (memory number display means). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are extinguished, a memory number of 0 is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a memory number of 1 is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, and in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is four. For example, the individual is displayed.

  Each time the game ball flows into the right start winning opening 26, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a changes to the display mode after being incremented one by one in the sense of memorizing that a winning has occurred. (Up to a maximum of four), every time the change of the special symbol is started with the winning, the display mode is changed by one by one. The second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is incremented by one in the sense of memorizing that a winning occurs each time a game ball flows into the variable starting winning device 28 (left starting winning port 28a). It changes to the display mode (up to a maximum of 4), and changes to the display mode after being reduced by one each time the change of the special symbol is triggered by the winning. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the first special symbol can be started to fluctuate (at the time of stop display) in the right start winning opening 26. Even if a game ball flows in, the display mode does not change. Further, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the variable start winning device 28 (left start winning port 28a) is in a state in which the second special symbol can already start to change (when stopped). The display mode does not change even if a game ball flows into (). That is, the number of memories (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of each special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, 35a is the number of winnings that have not yet started to change in the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Represents.

  The game state display device 38 includes five LEDs corresponding to, for example, jackpot type display lamps 37a, 37b, and 37c, a probability variation state display lamp 38c, and a short time state display lamp 38d. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol described above. The operation memory lamp 35a and the game state display device 38 are attached to the game board unit 8 in a state where they are mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Ball distribution device (first structural example)]
In FIG. 4, (B): The ball sorting apparatus 200 of the first structure example is based on winning (first event) at the right start winning opening 26 and variable starting winning apparatus 28 (left starting winning opening 28a) regardless of the gaming state. This is a device that promotes the occurrence of the second prize (second event).

  The ball sorting apparatus 200 includes a sorting guide path 201 having a width that allows one game ball to pass through. The distribution guiding path 201 has a tunnel-like structure, and two outlets (a first discharge port 204 and a second discharge port 203) are formed with respect to one inflow port 202. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 202 is guided to either the first discharge port 204 or the second discharge port 203. The distribution guiding path 201 is made of a transparent member, and the visibility of the game ball inside thereof is ensured.

  A cylindrical space is formed at the center of the distribution guiding path 201, and a windmill-shaped rotating body 205 is disposed in the space. The rotating body 205 has three wing members 205a, 205b, and 205c extending radially from the central axis. The rotating body 205 does not perform an operation by electric or other power, and rotates when the game ball collides with the wing members 205a, 205b, and 205c.

  Here, two projecting portions 206 a and 206 b that restrict the rotation of the rotating body 205 are provided in the distribution guide path 201 (near the middle between the second discharge port 203 and the first discharge port 204) in the lower part of the rotating body 205. Is provided. Then, when the wing members 205a and 205b are in contact with the protrusions 206a and 206b, the rotation of the rotating body 205 is restricted.

  5 and 6 are diagrams for explaining the operation principle of the ball sorting apparatus 200 of the first structure example. FIG. 5 shows a state where game balls are distributed in a manner that promotes winning to the variable start winning device 28 (left start winning port 28a), and FIG. 6 promotes winning to the right start winning port 26. The state in the case where game balls are distributed in a mode is shown.

[Distribution to variable start winning device 28 (left start winning port 28a)]
As shown in FIG. 5A, in the initial state, the wing member 205b of the rotating body 205 is in contact with the right protrusion 206b.
When the game ball 300 flows into the inflow port 202 in this state, the game ball 300 enters between the wing member 205a and the wing member 205c in the rotator 205, and the rotator 205 turns counterclockwise by the weight of the game ball 300 (counterclockwise). Around).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 5B, when the rotating body 205 rotates counterclockwise, the game ball 300 is guided to the second discharge port 203, and the game ball 300 is distributed to the variable start winning device 28 side. It is done. The wing member 205a of the rotating body 205 comes into contact with the left protrusion 206a, whereby the rotation of the rotating body 205 is restricted.

  The second discharge port 203 opens downward, and the distance D from the open end to the pair of obstacle nails (life nails) disposed above the variable start winning device 28 is slightly smaller than the diameter of the game ball 300, for example. Is set to be large. Therefore, the game balls 300 distributed to the variable start winning device 28 side may win the variable start winning device 28 (the left start winning port 28a) as it is, or be played by a pair of obstacle nails (life nails). There is a case where the variable start winning device 28 is not won. There is also a game ball 300 that wins the variable start winning device 28 (left start winning port 28a) without going through the ball sorting device 200 depending on the state of the obstacle nail in the game area 8a. In addition, the inflow path 28c between the left start winning opening 28a and the obstacle nail above it is a simple gate-like derivative as described above.

  The inflow path 28c defines the opening width W1 of the left starting winning port 28a together with the pair of obstacle nails to a normal size when the variable starting winning device 28 is not in operation. In this case, the opening width W1 is the game width. It is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere 300 (for example, about a hundred percent of the diameter). Further, when the variable start winning device 28 is operated, the pair of movable pieces 28b are opened in the width direction as described above, so that the opening width W2 of the left start winning prize port 28a (corresponding to the tip interval between the pair of movable pieces 28b). Is expanded more than usual. In addition, here, an example in which the size of the inflow path 28c is set to be somewhat longer in the vertical direction (same as the vertical dimension of the right start winning opening 26) is taken as an example, but the vertical dimension of the inflow path 28c is the gaming ball 300. It may be set smaller than the diameter.

[Distribution to the right start winning entrance 26]
As described above, when the allocation to the variable start winning device 28 (left start winning port 28a) is performed, the wing member 205a of the rotating body 205 is in contact with the left protrusion 206a. .

  As shown in FIG. 6A, when the game ball 300 flows into the inflow port 202 in this state, the game ball 300 enters between the wing member 205b and the wing member 205c in the rotating body 205, and the game ball 300 This time, due to the weight, the rotating body 205 rotates clockwise (clockwise).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 6B, when the rotating body 205 rotates clockwise, the game ball 300 is guided to the first discharge port 204, and the game ball 300 is distributed to the right start winning port 26 side. It is done. The wing member 205b of the rotator 205 comes into contact with the right protrusion 206b, whereby the rotation of the rotator 205 is restricted.

  Similarly, the first discharge port 204 is also opened downward, and the distance D from the open end to the pair of obstacle nails (life nails) disposed above the right start winning port 26 is also, for example, that of the game ball 300 It is set slightly larger than the diameter. Accordingly, the game balls distributed to the right start winning port 26 may be directly awarded to the right start winning port 26 as is the case with the variable start winning device 28 (left start winning port 28a) described above. There may be cases where the right start winning opening 26 is not won by being hit by a nail above the winning opening 26. In addition, depending on the state of other obstacle nails arranged in the game area 8a, there is a game ball 300 that wins the right start winning opening 26 without going through the ball sorter 200.

  In the present embodiment, since such a ball sorter 200 is employed, a winning (first event) at the right starting winning opening 26 and a winning (first starting winning opening 28a) at the right starting winning opening 28 (the first starting winning opening 28a). 2 events) can occur at a relatively high frequency. However, the ball sorting apparatus 200 alternately promotes a random winning that can be generated at the right start winning opening 26 and a random winning that can be generated at the variable starting winning apparatus 28 (the right starting winning opening 26). There is no way of performing the sorting operation in such a manner that the winnings are always made alternately.

  That is, the release of the game ball 300 from the first discharge port 204 by the ball distribution device 200 is an operation for giving a chance to generate a random winning at the right start winning port 26 (first opportunity giving operation). Also, the release of the game ball 300 from the second discharge port 203 by the ball distribution device 200 is an operation for giving a chance to generate a random winning at the left start winning port 28a (second opportunity giving operation). In the right start winning opening 26 and the left starting winning opening 28a, winnings can be randomly generated from the game area 4a independently of the sorting operation by the ball sorting apparatus 200. It is possible that the occurrence of winnings may continue, or that the winning at the left start winning opening 28a may continue.

[Ball distribution device (second structural example)]
Next, the ball sorting apparatus 200 of the second structure example will be described.
FIG. 7 is a front view showing a single game board unit 8 in which the ball sorting apparatus 200 of the second structural example is arranged instead of the first structural example. Similarly, the ball sorting apparatus 200 of the second structure example is also disposed below the ball discharge path 40f and above the variable start winning device 28 and the right start winning port 26. Here, there is no major change in the configuration of the game board unit 8 other than the structure of the ball sorting apparatus 200.

  FIG. 8 is a front view (A) and a partial cross-sectional view (B) showing the ball sorting apparatus 200 of the second structure example alone. Hereinafter, description will be made while comparing with the first structure example ((B) in FIG. 4 and the like). In addition, in the following description, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the element which is common in the 1st structure example.

  The ball sorting apparatus 200 of the second structure example has a front part 200a and a rear part 200b, for example, and these two parts 200a and 200b mainly constitute a main body portion (apparatus body) of the ball sorting apparatus 200. . Among these, the rear part 200b is attached in a state in which a part thereof is fitted to a plate material (for example, a veneer plate or a transparent resin plate) of the game board unit 8. That is, the rear part 200b has a plate-like shape in which most of the rear part 200b extends along the board surface, but both end parts are integrally formed with portions (not shown in FIG. 8) protruding in the heel direction of the board surface. Yes. These protruding portions are fitted into through holes (not shown) formed in the plate material of the game board unit 8. Further, the rear part 200b is attached to the game board unit 8, and a plate-like portion spreads along the board surface to decorate a part of the board surface.

  The front part 200a is made of, for example, a transparent resin material, and a distribution guiding path 201 extending in the left-right direction along the board surface is formed in the front part 200a. A rotating body 205 is disposed at the center of the sorting guide path 201 inside the front part 200a. The shape of the rotating body 205 is different from that of the first structural example, but the main function (the function of alternately distributing the game balls 300 while rotating clockwise or counterclockwise depending on the weight of the game balls 300) is the same. .

  The front part 200a is attached to the front surface of the rear part 200b, and in this state, an inflow port 202 is formed at an upper position of both the parts 200a and 200b. In the second structure example, the inflow port 202 is opened upward.

  The ball sorting apparatus 200 of the second structure example is different from the first structure example in the form of the first discharge port 204 and the second discharge port 203. That is, in the first structure example, the first discharge port 204 and the second discharge port 203 are open downward, but in the second structure example, both the first discharge port 204 and the second discharge port 203 are on the front surface. Open towards. Therefore, in the case of the second structure example, the opening surfaces of the first discharge port 204 and the second discharge port 203 are arranged in parallel with the front surface (board surface) of the game board unit 8.

  In order to form the first discharge port 204 and the second discharge port 203 facing the front side, the ball distribution device 200 of the second structural example is formed with vertical rectifying guide paths 208 and 209 in front view. These rectification induction paths 208 and 209 are respectively connected to both ends of the distribution induction path 201 and bent toward the back side of the board surface from there. Each of the rectifying guide paths 208 and 209 is inverted so as to enter the bottom of the board surface and further turn back to the front side of the board surface. And the 1st discharge port 204 and the 2nd discharge port 203 are located in the termination | terminus (open end) in which each rectification | straightening induction path 208,209 was reversed. The rectifying guide paths 208 and 209 are formed at the protruding portions of the rear part 200b described above.

  9 and 10 are exploded perspective views showing in more detail the configuration of the ball sorting apparatus 200 of the second structure example. Of these, FIG. 9 shows the ball sorting apparatus 200 from the diagonally upper front, and FIG. 10 shows the ball sorting apparatus 200 from the diagonally upper rear.

  As described above, the ball sorting apparatus 200 includes the front part 200a and the rear part 200b constituting the apparatus main body, and these two parts 200a and 200b are combined in the front-rear direction (Z-axis direction in the drawing). At this time, the rotating body 205 is disposed so as to be sandwiched between the front part 200a and the rear part 200b, and is rotatably supported in a state of being pin-connected to the parts 200a and 200b.

  In the rotating body 205, for example, a link rod 205d is formed on one wing member 205c, and the link rod 205d protrudes along the rotation axis of the rotating body 205 in the heel direction. On the other hand, an insertion hole 200e is formed in the rear part 200b, and the link rod 205d is inserted into the insertion hole 200e in a state where the rotating body 205 is supported by the front part 200a and the rear part 200b. Yes.

  Here, the ball sorting apparatus 200 of the second structure example has a moderation mechanism, and the moderation mechanism is configured by combining the lever member 205e and the counterweight 205f in addition to the link rod 205d. In addition, a case body 200c is attached to the rear surface of the rear part 200b, and parts constituting the moderation mechanism are accommodated in the case body 200c.

  The lever member 205e is rotatably supported on the same rotation axis as that of the rotating body 205, for example, while being pin-connected to the rear part 200b and the case body 200c. At this time, the link rod 205d of the rotating body 205 protrudes rearward through the insertion hole 200e, and is joined to one end (short arm) of the lever member 205e at the protruding end. The other end (long arm) of the lever member 205e is formed with a long hole (no reference numeral) along its longitudinal direction, and one end of the counterweight 205f is slider-joined in the long hole. It has become. The counterweight 205f is also pin-joined to the rear part 200b and the case body 200c, respectively, and is supported rotatably about its lower end pin (without reference numeral) as an axis.

  In such a moderation mechanism, when the rotating body 205 rotates either clockwise or counterclockwise, and any of the wing members 205a and 205b contacts the projections 206a and 206b, the rotation is restricted. In this state, moderation can be imparted to the rotating body 205 (holding posture). Specifically, when the rotation of the rotating body 205 is restricted, the lever member 205e is inclined left or right. At this time, the counterweight 205f attempts to restore the lever member 205e to a neutral posture (upright posture). The movement is suppressed. Thereby, the rotating body 205 is held in the posture after the game balls 300 are distributed.

  Note that the holding of the posture of the rotating body 205 by the moderation mechanism is released when the load of the game ball 300 is applied to the wing members 205a and 205b that are not in contact with the protrusions 206a and 206b. That is, since the moderation mechanism does not hold the posture of the rotating body 205 until the load of the game ball 300 is resisted, the sorting operation is not hindered.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the protruding part 200d of the rear part 200b is hollow, and the rectifying guide paths 208 and 209 are formed in the hollow. As shown in FIG. 10, the front part 200a has a pair of inclined plates 201a facing the left and right protruding portions 200d. When the front part 200a is combined with the rear part 200b, each inclined plate The tip portions of 201a are in a state of projecting into the corresponding protruding portions 200d.

  Each inclined plate 201 a is formed to be connected to both left and right ends of the distribution guiding path 201. The distribution guiding path 201 is inclined downward from the central position toward the left and right ends, and a step is provided at each end. Each inclined plate 201a is inclined downward from a position one step lower than both left and right ends of the distribution guide path 201 toward the heel direction (rear: Z-axis direction in the figure) of the board surface.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10, corner ribs 201b are formed in the corners where the inclined plates 201a are connected to the left and right ends of the distribution guide path 201 inside the front part 200a. The corner rib 201b has an arc shape along the corner portion, and the direction change of the game ball 300 can be guided by the arc surface.

[Game Ball Flow Mode]
FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing the flow-down mode of game balls in the ball sorting apparatus 200 of the second structure example. In FIG. 11, in order to prevent complication, illustration of components that are not shown on the appearance is omitted.

  11A: For example, when the wing member 205a of the rotating body 205 is in a posture in contact with the protrusion 206a, and the game ball 300 flows into the ball sorting apparatus 200 through the inlet 202 in this state, the rotating body 205 is The game ball 300 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and the game ball 300 is guided to the right of the distribution guide path 201 when viewed from the front. Then, when the game ball 300 rolls on the inclined plate 201a through the step from the right end of the sorting guide path 201, it is guided by the corner rib 201b and rolls in the heel direction of the game board unit 8. Then, the game ball 300 enters the rectifying guide path 209 due to the downward inclination of the inclined plate 201a and makes a U-turn (reverse) along an axis (Z axis in the figure) orthogonal to the board surface. Is released forward through.

  11B: Alternatively, when the wing member 205b of the rotating body 205 is in a posture in contact with the projection 206b, and the game ball 300 flows into the ball sorting apparatus 200 through the inlet 202 in this state, this time, the rotating body 205 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the game ball 300 is guided to the left of the distribution guide path 201 when viewed from the front. Then, when the game ball 300 rolls on the inclined plate 201a through the step from the left end of the sorting guide path 201, it is guided by the corner rib 201b and rolls in the heel direction of the game board unit 8. Then, the game ball 300 enters the rectifying guide path 209 due to the downward inclination of the inclined plate 201a and makes a U-turn (reverse) along an axis (Z-axis in the figure) orthogonal to the board surface. Is released forward through.

  In any of the above cases, the posture maintenance of the rotating body 205 by the moderation mechanism is released by the load of the game ball 300. Further, when the rotation of the rotating body 205 is restricted by distributing the game balls 300, the moderation mechanism works to maintain the posture of the rotating body 205.

  12 and 13 are diagrams for explaining the operation principle of the ball sorting apparatus 200 of the second structure example. 12 shows a state where game balls are distributed in a manner that promotes winning to the variable start winning device 28 (left start winning port 28a), and FIG. 13 shows winning in the right start winning port 26. A state in which game balls are distributed in a promoting manner is shown.

[Distribution to variable start winning device 28 (left start winning port 28a)]
In FIG. 12, (A): For example, in the initial state, it is assumed that the wing member 205b of the rotating body 205 is in contact with the right protrusion 206b. At this time, the posture maintenance by the moderation mechanism acts on the rotating body 205.

  When the game ball 300 flows into the inflow port 202 in this state, the game ball 300 enters between the wing member 205a and the wing member 205c in the rotating body 205, the moderation mechanism is released by the weight of the game ball 300, and the rotating body 205 Rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 12B, when the rotating body 205 rotates counterclockwise, the game ball 300 is guided in the left direction of the distribution guiding path 201 and reaches the left inclined plate 201a. When the rolling direction is converted to the back side by the corner rib 201b, the flow flows down to the left rectifying guide path 208 along the inclination of the inclined plate 201a. Then, the game ball 300 is guided by the rectifying guide path 208 to change its direction, and discharged from the second discharge port 203 to the front side. Thereby, the game balls 300 are distributed to the variable start winning device 28 side. At this time, the wing member 205a of the rotator 205 comes into contact with the left protrusion 206a, whereby the rotation of the rotator 205 is restricted. The posture of the rotating body 205 is held by the moderation mechanism until the next load of the game ball 300 flowing in is received.

  More preferably, U-turn ribs 200f are formed in the rectifying guide paths 208 and 209, respectively, and the U-turn ribs 200f are located in regions extending from the top surface of the rectifying guide paths 208 and 209 to the inner wall surface and the bottom surface. Is formed. The U-turn rib 200f has a U shape as a whole, and guides the smooth flow of the game ball 300 along the curved arc surface.

  In the second structural example, the second discharge port 203 is opened toward the front surface, and a pair of obstacle nails (life) disposed above the variable start winning device 28 from the lower end edge of the opening (the edge of the U-turn rib 200f). The distance D to the nail) may be set larger than the diameter of the game ball 300 or may be set smaller than the diameter of the game ball 300, for example. In any case, the game ball 300 re-released from the second discharge port 203 to the game area 8a (not shown in FIG. 12) is accompanied by a random flow and the variable start winning device 28 (the left start winning port 28a). ) Or a pair of obstacle nails (life nails) and may not win the variable start winning device 28. Similarly to the case of the first structural example, depending on the state of the obstacle nail in the game area 8a, the variable start winning device 28 (left start winning port 28a) is won from the periphery without passing through the ball sorting device 200. There is also a game ball 300.

[Distribution to the right start winning entrance 26]
(A) in FIG. 13: Next, it is assumed that the wing member 205a of the rotating body 205 is in contact with the left protrusion 206a. Also at this time, the posture maintenance by the moderation mechanism acts on the rotating body 205.

  When the game ball 300 flows into the inflow port 202 in this state, the game ball 300 enters this time between the wing member 205b and the wing member 205c in the rotating body 205, the moderation mechanism is released by the weight of the game ball 300, and the rotation The body 205 rotates clockwise (clockwise).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 13B, when the rotating body 205 rotates clockwise, the game ball 300 is guided in the right direction of the distribution guiding path 201 and reaches the right inclined plate 201a. When the rolling direction is converted to the back side by the corner rib 201b, the air flows down to the right rectifying guide path 209 along the inclination of the inclined plate 201a. Then, the game ball 300 is guided by the rectifying guide path 209 to change its direction, and discharged from the first discharge port 204 to the front side. Thereby, the game balls 300 are distributed to the right start winning opening 26 side. At this time, the wing member 205b of the rotating body 205 comes into contact with the right protrusion 206b, whereby the rotation of the rotating body 205 is restricted. The posture of the rotating body 205 is held by the moderation mechanism until the next load of the game ball 300 flowing in is received.

  In the second structure example, the first discharge port 204 is also open toward the front surface, and a pair of obstacle nails disposed above the right start winning port 26 from the lower end edge of the opening (the edge of the U-turn rib 200f). The distance D to (life nail) may be set larger than the diameter of the game ball 300, for example, or may be set smaller than the diameter of the game ball 300. In any case, the game ball 300 re-released from the first discharge port 204 to the game area 8a (not shown in FIG. 13) may win the right start winning port 26 with random flow. In some cases, the right start winning opening 26 is not won by being hit by a pair of obstacle nails (life nails). Here, as in the case of the first structure example, there is also a game ball 300 that wins the right start winning opening 26 from the periphery without passing through the ball sorter 200 depending on the state of the obstacle nail in the game area 8a.

  14 is a longitudinal sectional view (a sectional view taken along line XIV-XVI in FIG. 13) showing the internal structure of the ball sorting apparatus 200. Here, the right rectifying induction path 209 is taken as an example, but the structure of the left rectifying induction path 208 is the same.

  As described above, the plate material 8b of the game board unit 8 is formed with the through hole 8c, and the protruding portion 200d of the rear part 200b is fitted into the through hole 8c. For this reason, the rectifying guide path 209 extends from the board surface 8b to the inner side (thick part) toward the back side, is bent downward at the position of the flange, and then extends to the front side of the board surface. FIG. 14 shows the side shape of the U-turn rib 200f.

  Further, the first discharge port 204 is opened at substantially the same position as the board surface (in front of the thickness of the plate-like portion of the rear part 200b) when viewed in the front-rear direction (Z-axis direction in the figure), and the opening surface is parallel to the board surface. It turns out that it is.

[Rectifying action of game ball]
According to the ball sorting apparatus 200 of the second structure example, the following guidance and rectification are performed for the flow of the game ball 300.
(1) First, the game balls 300 that have flowed in through the inflow port 202 are alternately distributed in the left or right direction along the board surface by the rotating body 205 and the distribution guide path 201.
(2) Next, at the left and right ends of the distribution guide path 201, the game ball 300 rolls to the back side along an axis (Z axis in the figure) perpendicular to the board surface by the corner rib 201b and the inclined plate 201a, respectively. Change direction.
(3) In the right and left rectifying guide paths 208 and 209, the game ball 300 is U-turned along its axis (Z-axis in the figure) at a heel position from the board surface. At this time, the game ball 300 is flipped so as to sink into the bottom of the board.
(4) The U-turned game ball 300 is discharged again into the game area 8a through the first discharge port 204 or the second discharge port 203 opened toward the front surface.

  Through the processes of (2) to (3), the flow mode of the game ball 300 is adjusted from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction, and the momentum in the horizontal direction given in (1) is killed (rectifying action) ). As a result, the flow direction of the game ball 300 released from the first discharge port 204 or the second discharge port 203 is almost stable in the downward direction, and it is difficult for the game ball 300 to be violated in the left-right direction. 26 or the variable start winning device 28 (left start winning port 28a) can be made to be easily won at a high frequency.

  Therefore, even when the ball sorting apparatus 200 of the second structure example is used in the present embodiment, the winning at the right start winning opening 26 (first event) due to the gaming ball 300 flowing into the inflow port 202. In addition, it is possible to promote that the winning (second event) in the variable starting winning device 28 (the left starting winning opening 28a) occurs alternately at a relatively high frequency. However, similarly, the ball sorting apparatus 200 alternates between a random winning that can be generated at the right start winning opening 26 and a random winning that can be generated at the variable starting winning apparatus 28 (the right starting winning opening 26). The distribution operation is not performed in such a manner that the winnings are always made alternately.

  That is, also in the ball sorting apparatus 200 of the second structure example, the release of the game ball 300 from the first discharge port 204 is an operation for giving an opportunity to generate a random winning at the right start winning port 26 (first 1 opportunity giving operation). Also, the release of the game ball 300 from the second discharge port 203 by the ball distribution device 200 is an operation for giving a chance to generate a random winning at the left start winning port 28a (second opportunity giving operation). In the right start winning opening 26 and the left starting winning opening 28a, winnings can be randomly generated from the game area 8a independently of the sorting operation by the ball sorting apparatus 200. It is possible that the occurrence of winnings may continue, or that the winning at the left start winning opening 28a may continue.

[Characteristics of ball sorter]
The ball sorting apparatus 200 of the first structure example and the second structure example does not always generate a winning alternately with respect to the right start winning port 26 and the variable start winning device 28 (left start winning port 28a). Opportunities for winning a prize are given alternately. Therefore, even if a game ball flows into the inflow port 202 of the ball sorting apparatus 200, it does not immediately correspond to a “winning ball” at that time, and the inflow port 202 does not correspond to a “winning port”.

  For this reason, in the present embodiment, the right start winning port 26 and the variable start winning device 28 (left start winning port 28a) are respectively “winning ports”, and even if the game ball passes through the ball distribution device 200, the game ball is placed in the right start winning port. Even when winning 26, it is only necessary to obtain a random number for lottery corresponding to the first special symbol when the winning to the right start winning opening 26 is generated instead of flowing into the ball sorting apparatus 200. Further, even when a game ball wins the variable start winning device 28 (left start winning port 28a) via the ball distributing device 200, it is not the same flow into the ball distributing device 200 but only the variable start winning device. A random number for lottery corresponding to the second special symbol may be acquired in response to the occurrence of a winning at No. 28 (left start winning opening 28a).

  Thereby, it is not necessary to bother the right start winning port switch for detecting a winning or the left start winning switch in the ball sorting apparatus 200, and the structure of the ball sorting apparatus 200 can be simplified. Further, it is not necessary to design the right start winning opening 26 and the variable start winning apparatus 28 in a dedicated manner, and a common part that has been used in the past is simply laid out in accordance with the ball sorting apparatus 200. Unit 8 can be realized.

Next, details of the memory display unit 400 will be described.
15 and 16 are front views showing the periphery of the memory display device unit 400. FIG. FIG. 15 shows a state in which all the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h are brought down, and FIG. 16 shows a state in which all the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h are erected. . In FIG. 16, the coil spring is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 15, the memory display device unit 400 includes eight movable bodies 41a to 41h.
The leftmost movable body 41a to the fourth movable body 41d from the left are horizontally aligned with the base member of the production unit, and the rightmost from the fifth movable body 41e from the left. Up to the movable body 41h, the movable unit 41h is arranged side by side in an upward direction along the curved aspect of the base member of the effect unit.
Further, the leftmost movable body 41a to the fourth movable body 41d from the left are members of substantially the same size, but the fifth movable body 41e from the left to the rightmost movable body 41h. The size of each display body is gradually increased.

Further, two motors such as a first motor 310 and a second motor 320 are arranged below the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h. The first motor 310 and the second motor 320 can rotate forward and backward. The leftmost movable body 41a to the fourth movable body 41d from the left are driven by the first motor 310, and the fifth movable body 41e from the left to the rightmost movable body 41h are the second ones. It is driven by a motor 320.
Thus, in this embodiment, since the motor is arrange | positioned by the number smaller than the number of the eight movable bodies 41a-41h, the 1st motor 310 and the 2nd motor 320 each have four movable bodies. It will be movable. For this reason, compared with the case where one motor is assigned to one movable body, the number of parts can be reduced, and the space of the structure can be saved.

  Here, when the first motor 310 and the second motor 320 are rotated in a certain direction and to a certain position, as shown in FIG. 16, the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h are all in an upright state. When each movable body 41 is in an upright state, the upper surface of each movable body is directed toward the player, so that the visibility of the upper surface of the movable body is improved for the player and the surprise of moving the movable body is increased. Can be given.

  17 and 18 are rear views showing the periphery of the memory display unit 400. FIG. FIG. 17 shows a state in which all the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h are brought down, and FIG. 18 shows a state in which all the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h are erected. .

  As shown in FIG. 17, the memory display unit 400 includes a first motor gear 314 attached to the output shaft 312 of the first motor 310.

A fourth intermediate gear 440 is meshed with the first motor gear 314, and a fourth cam gear 540 is meshed with the fourth intermediate gear 440.
Further, the third intermediate gear 430 is engaged with the fourth cam gear 540, and the third cam gear 530 is engaged with the third intermediate gear 430.
Further, the second intermediate gear 420 is engaged with the third cam gear 530, and the second cam gear 520 is engaged with the second intermediate gear 420.
Furthermore, the first intermediate gear 410 is meshed with the second cam gear 520, and the first cam gear 510 is meshed with the first intermediate gear 410.
And the gear train which consists of these gears transmits the motive power with rotation of the 1st motor 310 (1st motor gear 314).

  The gear train is composed of an intermediate gear having a larger number of teeth (large diameter) than the first motor gear 314 located at the starting end thereof and a cam gear having a larger number of teeth (large diameter) than the intermediate gear. For this reason, the rotation of the first motor gear 314 is decelerated by the intermediate gear and further decelerated by the cam gear. When the rotation of the first motor gear 314 is transmitted from each cam gear to each intermediate gear, the rotation speed is temporarily accelerated.

  Further, the memory display unit 400 includes a second motor gear 324 attached to the output shaft 322 of the second motor 320.

A fifth intermediate gear 450 is engaged with the second motor gear 324, and a fifth cam gear 550 and a sixth cam gear 560 are engaged with the fifth intermediate gear 450.
Further, a sixth intermediate gear 460 is meshed with the sixth cam gear 560, and a seventh cam gear 570 is meshed with the sixth intermediate gear 460.
Further, a seventh intermediate gear 470 is meshed with the seventh cam gear 570, and an eighth cam gear 580 is meshed with the seventh intermediate gear 470.
And the gear train which consists of these gears transmits the motive power with rotation of the 2nd motor 320 (2nd motor gear 324).

  The gear train is constituted by an intermediate gear having a larger number of teeth (large diameter) than the second motor gear 324 located at the start end thereof and a cam gear having a larger number of teeth (large diameter) than the intermediate gear. For this reason, the rotation of the second motor gear 324 is decelerated by the intermediate gear and further decelerated by the cam gear. When the rotation of the second motor gear 324 is transmitted from each cam gear to each intermediate gear, the rotation speed is once accelerated.

  Further, two position detection devices 370 are installed on the front side of the fourth cam gear 540 and the fifth cam gear 550. The position detection device 370 includes a first photo sensor 350 and a second photo sensor 360, and two light shielding plates 372 (see FIG. 19).

The first photosensor 350 and the second photosensor 360 include an irradiation unit that emits light and a light-receiving unit that receives light, and the irradiation unit and the light-receiving unit are arranged to face each other with a predetermined interval.
The light shielding plate 372 is a plate-like member that is disposed on a side surface of the cam gear and at a position that passes between the irradiation portion and the light receiving portion of the photosensor and rotates integrally with the cam gear.

  When the cam gear rotates and the light shielding plate 372 is at the origin position, the photo sensor is in a light shielding state. Therefore, when the photo sensor is in a light shielding state (when receiving a detection signal indicating that the light sensor is in a light shielding state from the first photo sensor 350 or the second photo sensor 360 photo sensor), It can be determined that the cam gear is at the origin position.

As shown in FIG. 18, when the first motor 310 is driven and the first motor gear 314 is rotated clockwise in the figure, the fourth cam gear 540, the third cam gear 530, the second cam gear 520, and the first cam gear 510 are also displayed. Similarly, it rotates clockwise in the figure.
On the other hand, when the first motor 310 is driven to rotate the first motor gear 314 in the clockwise direction in the drawing, the fourth intermediate gear 440, the third intermediate gear 430, the second intermediate gear 420, and the first intermediate gear 410 are moved. On the contrary, it rotates counterclockwise in the figure.

When the second motor 320 is driven to rotate the second motor gear 324 clockwise in the figure, the eighth cam gear 580, the seventh cam gear 570, the sixth cam gear 560 and the fifth cam gear 550 are similarly shown in the figure. Rotate clockwise.
On the other hand, when the second motor 320 is driven to rotate the second motor gear 324 in the clockwise direction in the drawing, the seventh intermediate gear 470, the sixth intermediate gear 460, and the fifth intermediate gear 450 are reversed. Rotates counterclockwise.

  As described above, when the first motor 310 and the second motor 320 are driven, the first motor gear 314 and the second motor gear 324 rotate. Therefore, the intermediate gears and the cam gears that follow the first motor gear 314 and the second motor gear 324 can be rotated in conjunction with each other. it can. And if the 1st motor 310 and the 2nd motor 320 are rotated to a fixed direction and a fixed position, as shown in FIG. 18, all the eight movable bodies 41a-41h will be in the standing state. When the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h are in a standing state, the upper surface of each movable body is more directed toward the player, so that the visibility of the upper surface of the movable body is improved for the player, and the movable body You can give a surprise by moving.

19 and 20 are plan views showing the periphery of the memory display unit 400. FIG. FIG. 19 shows a state in which all the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h are brought down, and FIG. 20 shows a state in which all the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h are erected. .
As shown in FIG. 19, in a state where all the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h are tilted, most of the upper surfaces of the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h face the upper portion of the game board unit. In addition, even if all the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h are brought down, the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h are not completely neglected but maintain a slightly inclined state. The upper surface of the movable body faces the player side. In addition, the first photosensor 350, the second photosensor 360, and the two light shielding plates 372 are disposed on the back surfaces of the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20, in a state where all the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h are erected, most of the upper surfaces of the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h are directed to the player side. For this reason, it is possible to improve the visibility of the upper surfaces of the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h and to give the player a surprise due to the movement of the movable bodies.

FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view showing a peripheral portion of one movable body alone. 21A shows a state in which the movable body is seen from the upper right side obliquely on the front side, and FIG. 21B shows a state in which the movable body is seen from the lower left side obliquely on the back side.
In the illustrated example, the fourth movable body 41d from the left is shown as one movable body, but the other movable bodies have the same basic configuration.

  As shown in FIG. 21A, the movable body 41d has a flat cubic shape, and has a chamfered portion 370 having a large slope at the upper surface corner portion on the near side. The movable body 41d is a hollow member as shown in FIG. Further, the movable body 41d is made of a resin or the like that transmits light emitted from a light emitting diode (not shown) disposed inside.

A cylindrical convex portion 372 is formed on the left and right side surfaces of the movable body 41d and below the chamfered portion 370, and the convex portion 372 is inserted into a circular concave portion (not shown) of the effect unit 40. Is done.
In addition, a semi-disc shaped projection 374 is formed on the lower surface of the movable body 41d. A through hole 376 is formed in the protrusion 374, and a rod-shaped link shaft 380 is inserted into the through hole 376.

In the fourth cam gear 540, a tooth portion 541 constituting a gear train is formed on one end surface, and a cam portion 542 having a predetermined shape is formed on the other end surface. Further, a light shielding plate 372 is attached to the tooth portion 541.
The fourth slider 640 includes a vertically long thin plate-like main body 642, a hook-shaped hook 644 formed at the upper end of the main body 642, and a hook-shaped hook 646 formed on the surface of the main body 642. And a cylindrical roller 59 formed on the back surface of the main body 642.

  A link shaft 380 is inserted into the hook portion 644, and the roller 59 contacts the outer edge of the cam portion 542. In addition, a coil spring 390 is attached to the hook 646, and the roller 59 is biased to the cam portion 542 by the coil spring 390. One end of the coil spring 390 is hooked on the hook 646, and the other end of the coil spring 390 is fixed to an effect unit (not shown) by a screw 391.

When the cam portion 542 rotates with the rotation of the fourth cam gear 540, the roller 59 in contact with the cam portion 542 moves up and down along the outer shape of the cam portion 542. Since the roller 59 is coupled to the main body 642, when the roller 59 moves up and down, the main body 642 also moves up and down.
And when the main-body part 642 raises, since the hook part 644 formed in the upper end of the main-body part 642 will also rise, the link shaft 380 arrange | positioned inside the hook part 644 will also raise.
At this time, the link shaft 380 does not simply rise, but rises following an arcuate locus with the convex portion 372 as the rotation center. For this reason, if the main-body part 642 raises, the movable body 41a will stand up with the upper surface facing a player.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the fourth slider 640 moves according to the amount of undulation of the cam portion 542, and the movable body 41d moves as the fourth slider 640 moves. For this reason, the power from the motor serving as the drive source is transmitted from the cam portion 542 to the fourth slider 640, which is directly transmitted to the movable body 41d. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, since the drive mechanism that directly moves the movable body 41d by the undulation difference of the cam portion 542 is provided, there is no need for a mechanism that amplifies the undulation difference of the cam portion 542, and the structure can be moved with a simple structure. The body 41d can be moved.

22-25 is a figure for demonstrating the detail of a cam gear and a cam part.
22 and 23 are views showing the state of the cam portion in a state where all the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h are tilted. FIGS. 24 and 25 are views showing the cam portion in a state where all of the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h are erected. Here, FIG.22 and FIG.24 has shown the front view, and FIG.23 and FIG.25 has shown the perspective view.

Each cam gear of this embodiment has a cam part of a different shape.
Specifically, as shown in each drawing, the first cam gear 510 has a first cam portion 512, the second cam gear 520 has a second cam portion 522, and the third cam gear 530 has a third cam portion 532. The fourth cam gear 540 has a fourth cam portion 542, the fifth cam gear 550 has a fifth cam portion 552, the sixth cam gear 560 has a sixth cam portion 562, and a seventh cam gear 570. Has a seventh cam portion 572 and the eighth cam gear 580 has an eighth cam portion 582.

Each cam portion is provided with a movable position cam surface K1, a retreat position cam surface K2, and an intermediate cam surface K3 on its side surface.
The movable position cam surface K1 is a cam surface for disposing the movable body 41a and the like at a movable position (a standing position). Therefore, the movable position cam surface K1 is a surface along the circumferential direction arranged on the outermost peripheral side of the end surface of each cam gear.

  The retreat position cam surface K2 is a cam surface for disposing the movable body 41a and the like at the retreat position (falling position). Therefore, the retreat position cam surface K2 is a surface along the circumferential direction that is disposed on the innermost peripheral side of the end surface of the cam gear.

  The intermediate cam surface K3 is a cam surface for moving the movable body 41a and the like from the retracted position to the movable position, or from the movable position to the retracted position. Therefore, the retracting position cam surface K2 is a surface disposed between the movable position cam surface K1 and the retracting position cam surface K2 of the end face of the cam gear.

  Each movable position cam surface K1 provided in each cam portion is a cam surface whose length gradually decreases in order to move each slider sequentially from the end and move each movable body sequentially from the end. Have

  Specifically, for the left four cam gears, the movable position cam surface K1 of the first cam gear 510 is the longest, the movable position cam surface K1 of the second cam gear 520 is the next longest, and the movable position of the third cam gear 530 is The cam surface K1 is the next longest, and the movable cam surface K1 of the fourth cam gear 540 is the shortest.

  For the four right cam gears, the movable position cam surface K1 of the fifth cam gear 550 is the longest, the movable position cam surface K1 of the sixth cam gear 560 is the next longest, and the movable position cam surface of the seventh cam gear 570 is. K1 is the next longest, and the movable position cam surface K1 of the eighth cam gear 580 is the shortest.

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h can be moved in order from the end with a simple configuration in which the length of the movable position cam surface K1 is shortened stepwise, and the drive mechanism Can be avoided.

Further, each intermediate cam surface K3 provided in the cam portion has a cam surface having the same phase and the same shape in a part thereof in order to simultaneously move the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h.
Specifically, the right intermediate cam surface K3 of the first cam gear 510, the right intermediate cam surface K3 of the second cam gear 520, the right intermediate cam surface K3 of the third cam gear 530, and the right intermediate cam surface of the fourth cam gear 540. The surface K3 is a cam surface having the same phase and the same shape.

  Further, the intermediate cam surface K3 on the right side of the fifth cam gear 550, the intermediate cam surface K3 on the upper right side of the sixth cam gear 560, the intermediate cam surface K3 on the upper side of the seventh cam gear 570, and the intermediate cam surface K3 on the left side of the eighth cam gear 580. However, the cam surfaces have the same phase and the same shape. In addition, with respect to the fifth cam gear 550 to the eighth cam gear 580, the arrangement position of the intermediate cam surface K3 is shifted stepwise, because this is because the protruding direction of the movable body (slider) is different, and the rotation of each cam gear. The cam surfaces have the same phase and the same shape with respect to the direction.

  For this reason, a plurality of movable bodies are driven by the same movement on the intermediate cam surface K3 having cam surfaces of the same shape in the portions having the same phase. Thus, by unifying a part of the shape of each intermediate cam surface K3, a plurality of movable bodies can be moved simultaneously with a simple configuration, and the complexity of the drive mechanism can be avoided.

Here, four movable bodies 41a to 41d on the left side are arranged side by side in the left-right direction (predetermined direction) (see FIG. 15).
Also, four left first four cam gears 510 to fourth cam gear 540 are arranged according to the four movable bodies 41a to 41d.
The four left first cam gears 510 to 540 have two different positions (upper first positions) in the vertical direction (Y direction in the figure) perpendicular to the left and right direction (predetermined direction; X direction in the figure). Y1 and lower second position Y2) are alternately arranged. That is, the first cam gear 510 and the third cam gear 530 are disposed at the upper first position Y1, and the second cam gear 520 and the fourth cam gear 540 are disposed at the lower second position Y2.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the four first cam gears 510 to the fourth cam gear 540 are alternately arranged at two different positions (first position Y1 and second position Y2). Compared with the case where the first cam gear 510 and the fourth cam gear 540 are arranged closer to each other, the four first cam gears 510 to the fourth cam gear 540 can be arranged closer to each other, and the space of the structure can be saved.

Here, in the example shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, since the cam portion in a state where all of the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h are tilted is shown, as shown in FIG. The roller 59 is disposed near the rotation center of the cam gear.
On the other hand, the example shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 shows the state of the cam portion in a state where the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h are erected, and therefore, as shown in FIG. 59 is arranged away from the rotation center of the cam gear.

  26 and 27 are diagrams illustrating an operation example of the four left movable bodies 41a to 41d. FIG. 26 shows a state in which all the left four movable bodies 41a to 41d are tilted, and FIG. 27 shows a state in which all the left four movable bodies 41a to 41d are erected.

[Counterclockwise]
Here, first, the operation when the first motor 310 is rotated counterclockwise in the drawing will be described.
When the first motor 310 is rotated counterclockwise in the drawing from the state shown in FIG. 26, the output shaft 312 of the first motor 310 also rotates counterclockwise. Here, since the output shaft 312 of the first motor 310 is illustrated, the illustration of the motor gear is omitted.
As a result, the motor gear attached to the output shaft 312 of the first motor 310 also rotates counterclockwise.
When the motor gear rotates counterclockwise, the fourth intermediate gear 440 rotates clockwise in the figure.
When the fourth intermediate gear 440 rotates clockwise, the fourth cam gear 540 rotates counterclockwise. Similarly, the third intermediate gear 430, the second intermediate gear 420, and the first intermediate gear 410 rotate clockwise. On the other hand, the third cam gear 530, the second cam gear 520, and the first cam gear 510 rotate counterclockwise.

As a result, the roller 59 in contact with each cam portion rises along the outer shape of each cam portion. When the roller 59 is raised, the first slider 610, the second slider 620, the third slider 630, and the fourth slider 640 having the roller 59 are also raised together.
And when each slider raises, as shown in FIG. 27, all four movable bodies 41a-41d will stand up simultaneously. In FIG. 27, the coil spring is not shown.

[Clockwise]
Next, the operation when the first motor 310 is rotated clockwise in the drawing will be described.
When the first motor 310 is rotated clockwise in the drawing from the state shown in FIG. 26, the output shaft 312 of the first motor 310 is also rotated clockwise.
As a result, the motor gear attached to the output shaft 312 of the first motor 310 also rotates clockwise.
When the motor gear rotates clockwise, the fourth intermediate gear 440 rotates counterclockwise in the drawing.
When the fourth intermediate gear 440 rotates counterclockwise, the fourth cam gear 540 rotates clockwise. Similarly, the third intermediate gear 430, the second intermediate gear 420, and the first intermediate gear 410 rotate counterclockwise. On the other hand, the third cam gear 530, the second cam gear 520, and the first cam gear 510 rotate clockwise.

As a result, the roller 59 in contact with each cam portion rises along the outer shape of each cam portion. In this case, since the outer shapes of the cam portions are different, the rollers 59 rise in order from the left side. When the roller 59 rises in order from the left side, the first slider 610, the second slider 620, the third slider 630, and the fourth slider 640 having the roller 59 also rise in order from the left side.
And when each slider raises in order from the left side, the four movable bodies 41a-41d will also stand up in order from the left side.

  28 and 29 are diagrams illustrating an operation example of the four movable bodies 41e to 41h on the right side. FIG. 28 illustrates a state in which all the four movable bodies 41e to 41h on the right side are tilted, and FIG. 29 illustrates a state in which all the four movable bodies 41e to 41h on the right side are erected.

[Counterclockwise]
Here, first, the operation when the second motor 320 is rotated counterclockwise in the figure will be described.
When the second motor 320 is rotated counterclockwise in the drawing from the state shown in FIG. 28, the output shaft of the second motor 320 is also rotated counterclockwise. The output shaft and motor gear of the second motor 320 are disposed on the back side of the second motor 320.
When the output shaft of the second motor 320 rotates counterclockwise, the motor gear attached to the output shaft of the second motor 320 also rotates counterclockwise.
When the motor gear rotates counterclockwise, the fifth intermediate gear 450 rotates clockwise in the drawing.
When the fifth intermediate gear 450 rotates clockwise, the fifth cam gear 550 and the sixth cam gear 560 rotate counterclockwise. Similarly, the sixth intermediate gear 460 and the seventh intermediate gear 470 rotate clockwise. On the other hand, the seventh cam gear 570 and the eighth cam gear 580 rotate counterclockwise.

Thereby, the roller 59 in contact with each cam portion moves to a position away from the rotation center of each cam gear along the outer shape of each cam portion. When the roller 59 moves, the fifth slider 650, the sixth slider 660, the seventh slider 670, and the eighth slider 680 having the roller 59 also move together.
When each slider moves, as shown in FIG. 29, all four movable bodies 41a to 41d stand up simultaneously. In FIG. 29, the coil spring is not shown.

[Clockwise]
Next, the operation when the second motor 320 is rotated clockwise in the drawing will be described.
When the second motor 320 is rotated clockwise in the drawing from the state shown in FIG. 28, the output shaft of the second motor 320 is also rotated clockwise. The output shaft and motor gear of the second motor 320 are disposed on the back side of the second motor 320.
When the output shaft of the second motor 320 rotates clockwise, the motor gear attached to the output shaft of the second motor 320 also rotates clockwise.
When the motor gear rotates clockwise, the fifth intermediate gear 450 rotates counterclockwise in the drawing.
When the fifth intermediate gear 450 rotates counterclockwise, the fifth cam gear 550 and the sixth cam gear 560 rotate clockwise. Similarly, the sixth intermediate gear 460 and the seventh intermediate gear 470 rotate counterclockwise. On the other hand, the seventh cam gear 570 and the eighth cam gear 580 rotate clockwise.

Thereby, the roller 59 in contact with each cam portion moves to a position away from the rotation center of each cam gear along the outer shape of each cam portion. In this case, since the outer shapes of the cam portions are different, the rollers 59 move sequentially from the left side. When the roller 59 moves in order from the left side, the fifth slider 650, the sixth slider 660, the seventh slider 670, and the eighth slider 680 having the roller 59 also move in order from the left side.
And if each slider moves in order from the left side, the four movable bodies 41e-41h will also stand up in order from the left side.

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 30 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices equipped in the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that serves as the center of the control operation. The main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. Yes. The main controller 70 is built in the main control board unit 170 described above.

  The main controller 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72 as a central processing unit is mounted. The main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74 and a RAM (RWM) together with a CPU core and registers (not shown). ) This is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as 76 are integrated. The main controller 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Among these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for the big symbol determination of the special symbol lottery or the normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here is generated. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main controller 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), a counter / timer circuit (CTC), etc., and these are circuited together with the main control CPU 72. It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or the inner layer portion).

  The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of a game ball. The game board unit 8 is provided with a right start winning port switch 80, a left start winning port switch 82 and a count switch 84 corresponding to the right start winning port 26, the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30, respectively. Yes. Each start winning port switch 80, 82 is for detecting a winning of a game ball to the right start winning port 26 and the variable start winning device 28 (left start winning port 28a). Further, the count switch 84 is for detecting the winning of a game ball to the variable winning device 30 (large winning opening) and counting the number thereof as described above. Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a winning port switch 86 for detecting the winning of a game ball to the normal winning ports 22 and 24. Here, a configuration using a common winning opening switch 86 for all the normal winning openings 22 and 24 is given as an example, but for example, separate winning opening switches 86 are installed on the left and right sides of the board, and the left winning opening switch is provided. In 86, a winning of a game ball for the normal winning ports 22, 24 located on the left side of the board surface is detected, and in the right winning port switch 86, a winning of a game ball in the normal winning port 24 located on the right side of the board surface is detected. Also good.

  In any case, the winning detection signals of these switches 78 to 86 are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in this embodiment, the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the count switch 84 and the winning opening switch 86 are transmitted via the panel relay terminal plate 87, and are sent to the panel relay terminal plate 87. Are provided with wiring patterns and connection terminals for relaying the respective winning detection signals.

  The above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and game The state display device 38 is controlled in display operation based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. The display devices 33, 34, 35, and 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, and 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display substrate 89 through the panel relay terminal board 87.

  Further, the game board unit 8 is provided with a normal electric accessory solenoid 88 and a big prize opening solenoid 90 corresponding to the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30, respectively. These solenoids 88 and 90 are operated (excited) based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72 to open and close (activate) the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30 respectively. The solenoids 88 and 90 also transmit control signals from the main control CPU 72 through the panel relay terminal plate 87 described above.

  In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the glass frame unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the plastic frame assembly 7. When the glass frame unit 4 is opened alone, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), and when the plastic frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame assembly 2. The contact point signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the glass frame unit 4 or the plastic frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door opening information signal as the external information signal.

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a payout control device 92 is equipped (special privilege grant means). The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted. The payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 96 and a RAM 98 is integrated together with a CPU core not shown. It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

  In a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, a payout device substrate 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor). The payout device substrate 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. Yes. The payout device substrate 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (the payout control CPU 94), and pays out the designated number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let it come out. The paid-out game balls are sent to the tray unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

  Further, for example, a payout path ball cut switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. When a prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a count signal from the payout count switch 106 is input to the payout device substrate 100 each time. Further, when a ball break occurs at an upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout path ball break switch 104 is input to the payout device substrate 100. The dispensing device substrate 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the dispensing control device 92 (dispensing control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual payout number and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device substrate 100.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a full switch 161, for example, inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the bowl as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) that are actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173. When the upper plate 6b is full of game balls, As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. When the lower tray 6c is filled with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned ON, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, even if the payout control CPU 94 receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, it temporarily suspends further prize ball operations, and stores the unpaid prize ball remaining number in the RAM 98. Note that the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is cut off, so that even if a power failure (including momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the number of remaining unsold prize balls will not be lost. .

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with the firing control board 108. In addition, a ball feeding solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above, and the launch control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of sending out the game balls stored in the tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Moreover, the launch solenoid 110 hits the game ball sent to the launch position, and performs the operation of firing game balls one by one continuously (intermittently) toward the game area 8 as described above. The game ball is emitted at intervals of, for example, about 0.6 seconds (within 100 per minute).

  On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Among these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the operation amount (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. The touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal. The firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) in accordance with the player's operation.

  The above receiving tray unit 6 is provided with a launch relay terminal plate 118, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is sent via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Sent to. The drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal board 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the operation amount, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. Thereby, the strength of launching a game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the player. The drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. . In addition to this, the launch relay terminal plate 118 is connected with a lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, and when the above-mentioned CR unit is not connected to this lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, the launch is similarly performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

  The tray unit 6 includes a frequency display board 122 and a rental / return switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the display of the frequency display unit (7-segment LED for 3 digits). The lending / return switch board 123 has switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12, respectively. When the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lended and It is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connecting terminal board 120. Further, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted from the CR unit to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display unit based on the frequency signal, and displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium as a numerical value. If no valuable medium is inserted in the CR unit or the remaining frequency of the inserted valuable medium becomes zero, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display device to display a demonstration (of the valuable medium). (Display for prompting input) can also be performed.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which an effect control CPU 126 that is a central processing unit is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a CPU core (not shown) and a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 and a RAM 130 as a main memory. The production control device 124 is provided at a position covered by the back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp driving circuit 132 and an acoustic driving circuit 134. The production control CPU 126 performs production control based on the production command transmitted from the main control CPU 72, and gives commands to the lamp driving circuit 132 and the acoustic driving circuit 134 to emit various lamps 46 to 52 and the panel lamp 53. Or a process of actually outputting sound effects, voices, and the like from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, the communication between these is performed only in one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the reverse direction is not performed. Note that the communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus width of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, or each driver IC (I / O). A serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration.

  The lamp driving circuit 132 includes a switching element such as a PWM (pulse width modulation) IC or a MOSFET (not shown). The lamp driving circuit 132 switches driving voltages (or duty switching) applied to various lamps including LEDs. ) And manage the operation such as light emission and flashing. The various lamps include a board lamp 53 for decoration and performance installed in the game board unit 8 in addition to the glass frame top lamps 46 and 48, the glass frame side lamp 50, and the tray lamp 52. The panel lamp 53 corresponds to an LED incorporated in the above-described effect unit, or an LED incorporated in the large lamp 57, the variable start winning device 28, the variable winning device 30 or the like. Here, although the example in which the saucer lamp 52 is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136 is given, a saucer illuminated board is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the saucer lamp 52 is interposed via the saucer illuminated board. It may be configured to be connected to the lamp driving circuit 132.

  The acoustic drive circuit 134 is, for example, a sound generator that includes a sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, and the like (not shown). The acoustic drive circuit 134 drives the upper speaker 54 and the lower speaker 56 to perform acoustic output.

  In the present embodiment, a glass frame decoration board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the glass frame unit 4, and drive signals from the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134 pass through the glass frame decoration board 136 and various lamps 46. To 52 and speakers 54, 55, and 56. Further, the effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136, and when the player operates the effect switching button 45, the contact signal is input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame decorating board 136. Is done. In addition, although the example which connected the production | presentation switch button 45 to the glass-frame decoration board 136 is given here, when installing said saucer illumination board, the production switch button 45 is connected to the saucer illumination board. Also good.

  In addition, a panel board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8. In addition to the panel lamp 53, the panel board 138 has a first motor 310, a second motor 320, a movable body lamp 330, and a memory display. The lamp 340, the first photosensor 350, and the second photosensor 360 are connected. The 1st motor 310 and the 2nd motor 320 drive eight movable bodies 41a-41h via each drive mechanism. A drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the panel lamp 53, the first motor 310, the second motor 320, the movable body lamp 330, and the memory display lamp 340 via the panel illumination board 138, respectively. On the other hand, output signals from the first photosensor 350 and the second photosensor 360 are input to the effect control device 124 (effect control CPU 126) via the panel illumination board 138. The movable body lamp 330 is disposed inside the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h, and each movable body is made of a material that transmits light. Therefore, when the movable body lamp 330 emits light, the movable body lamp 330 is movable. The effect that the body itself emits light can be exhibited.

  The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display screen is visible through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power source that is applied to a backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. Further, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146 that is a general-purpose central processing unit and a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a VDP 152 that is a display processor is mounted. Among these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as a ROM 148 and a RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). The VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which a semiconductor core such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 is integrated with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of the storage area as a frame buffer.

  The ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126 stores a basic program related to effect control, and the effect control CPU 126 executes effect control according to this program. The production control includes production control using various lamps 46 to 53 and speakers 54, 55, and 56 as described above, and production control by image display using the liquid crystal display 42. . The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, effect number) related to the effect to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives the information transmits a specific effect image based on the basic information. Control the display.

  The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. Receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads necessary image data therefrom, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Further, the VDP 152 expands the image data in the frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time) on the VRAM 156, and individually handles each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the buffered image data. To drive.

  In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the plastic frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit. When external power (for example, AC 24V) is taken from the island facility through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V) can be generated therefrom. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, the effect display control device 144, and the inverter board 158. Note that power is supplied to the effect display control display device 144 and the inverter board 158 via the effect control device 124, and power is supplied to the liquid crystal display 42 via the effect display control device 144 and the inverter board 158, respectively. Have been supplied. Furthermore, power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. The low voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded (grounded) to the island facility through the ground wire 166.

  The external terminal plate 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) pass through the payout control device 92 to the external terminal plate 160. Is output to the outside. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are collected by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in a game hall. Here, the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example, but a configuration in which an external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 may be used.

  The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Next, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts a reset start process. The reset start process restores the gaming state based on the backup information saved at the previous power shutdown (so-called power recovery) or conversely clears the backup information, thereby adjusting the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 Process. The reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

  31 and 32 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the process performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

  Step S101: First, the main control CPU 72 sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

  Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector-type interrupt mode (mode 2) and corrects the default RST-type interrupt mode (mode 0). Thus, thereafter, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute a designated interrupt handler.

  Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a standby process at reset. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, power-on) and checking the main power-off detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the waiting time, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power-off detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power-off detection signal is input from, for example, a power monitoring IC that is a peripheral device. If the input of the main power-off detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the process from the beginning. As a result, for example, the system can be protected when a main power switch (not shown) is turned on and off repeatedly within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

  Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value in the work area is reset (00H). As a result, thereafter, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

  Step S105: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of a mask register in order to set an interrupt mask. Specifically, a value for enabling the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

  Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the previously cleared RAM clear switch and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is executed next.

  Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not a backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power-off process and the backup validity determination flag (for example, “A55AH”) is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

  Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a sum check on the backup information in the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sum-checks all areas of the work area of the RAM 76 (a user work area including a use-prohibited area and a stack area) except the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: The main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the occurrence of the previous power interruption.

  Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 instructs the effect control device 124 to return a command (for example, a model designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when the working memory number is increased, and the action memory number. (Decrease effect command, count counter remaining command, special game state designation command, etc.). In response to this, the effect control device 124 performs the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the effect symbol display mode, the operation memory count effect display mode, the sound output content, and the various lamps being executed at the time of the previous power shutdown. Light emission state, etc.) can be restored.

  Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes state return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the gaming state (for example, the display state of special symbols, the internal probability state, The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. The main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated at power-on (step S106: Yes), when the backup validity determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to Step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the use prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
Step S114: The main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of the RAM 76.

  Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command necessary for effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

  Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes a payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of prize balls to the payout control device 92.

  Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes CTC initial setting processing, and performs initial setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) that is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an interrupt vector register and sets an interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue the processing from the program address of the PC register that has been backed up.

  When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 32 (connection symbol A → A).

  Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 executes the power interruption occurrence check process after prohibiting interruption. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs bit check on the input port of the main power-off detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power-off (decrease in drive voltage). When the power is cut off, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the big prize opening solenoid 90, etc., and the entire area excluding the backup validity judgment flag and the sum check buffer in the work area of the RAM 76. Is backed up, and the sum result value is stored in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup validity determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops (NOP) the process. On the other hand, if the power shutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU executes the process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption as a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) process.

  Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) initial values of various software random numbers. In this embodiment, jackpot determined random numbers (hardware random numbers) and various random numbers excluding hit determined random numbers (hardware random numbers) corresponding to ordinary symbols (for example, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) Is generated in the program. These software random numbers are updated by the loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 34). In this process, the initial value of the loop counter (all The random number of may not be the target). The initial value updating random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value updating random number is updated. The reason why step S120 is executed after interrupts are prohibited in step S118 is the same as another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 34). ) To prevent the above). As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit decision random number and the hit decision random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle is faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms) ( For example, it is not necessary to update the big hit determined random number and the initial value of the hit determined random number.

  Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits the interrupt and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this processing are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among software random numbers. This process is performed in the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 34). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power failure check processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart specifically illustrating a procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process.
Step S130: First, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power interruption. This check condition can be set as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power-off detection signal is continuously output, for example.

  Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power-off detection switch input port and confirms whether or not the main power-off detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly illustrated, the main power-off detection switch is mounted on the main controller 70, for example, and this main power-off detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power control unit 162, and the voltage level is monitored. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, the main power-off detection signal is output. Note that the main power-off detection switch may be built in the power control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power-off detection signal is not output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power-off detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

  Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check conditions are satisfied. Specifically, for example, 1 is subtracted from the on-counter value set in the previous step S130, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not yet 0 at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power-off detection switch input port. When the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

  Step S136: The main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the test signal terminal and the command control signal in addition to the output port corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the big prize opening solenoid 90 as described above.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer in the work area of the RAM 76 in units of 1 byte, and repeats until the addition is completed for all areas. .
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum is completed for all the areas (Step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 stores the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value in the backup validity determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: The main control CPU 72 stores “01H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the use prohibition area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters a standby loop and stops all other processes in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power is cut off, the backup power is supplied from a backup power circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main controller 70), so the stored contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power is turned off. Held without. The backup power supply circuit may be incorporated in the power supply control unit 162, for example.

  Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (sum added) is retained in the RAM 76 even after the main power is turned off. The stored memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming that the checksum is normal in the previous reset start process (FIG. 31).

[Interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing)]
Next, interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing) will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of interrupt management processing. The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written in the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

  Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76 and loops within a specified range. Various random numbers include, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers.

  Step S202: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process also here. The content of the process is the same as described above.

  Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes input processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from an input / output (I / O) port 79. Specifically, an input state (ON / OFF) of a passage detection signal from the gate switch 78 and a winning detection signal from the right starting winning port switch 80, left starting winning port switch 82, count switch 84, and winning port switch 86. Lead.

  Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the determination of an event occurring during the game is made based on the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the right start winning port switch 80, and the left starting winning port switch 82. Depending on the event that occurred, further processing is executed. The specific contents of the switch input event process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In this embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the right start winning port switch 80 or the left starting winning port switch 82, the main control CPU 72 performs internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers the event (lottery opportunity) has occurred. When the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event serving as a lottery trigger corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. If it is determined that any event has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes a process corresponding to each event. The processing executed when a winning detection signal is input from the right start winning port switch 80 or the left starting winning port switch 82 will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S205, Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol game process and a normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically proceeding with the game in the pachinko machine 1. Of these, in the special symbol game process (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 34. (2) The variable display and stop display by the special symbol display device 35 are controlled, and the operation of the variable winning device 30 is controlled according to the display result. Details of the special symbol game process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In the normal symbol game process (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display and stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and controls the operation of the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. To do. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (ordinary random number per symbol) acquired in response to the passage of the start gate 20 in the previous switch input event processing (step S204). The random number value is read out from the memory, and it is determined whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after stopping the normal symbol in a predetermined hit state, the main control CPU 72 switches the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 on. Excitingly activates the variable start winning device 28 (movable piece actuating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a normal symbol stop display in a manner of deviation after the variable display.

  Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes prize ball payout processing. In this process, based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 82, 84, 86 in the previous input process (step S203), a prize ball instruction command for instructing the payout control device 92 the number of prize balls is issued. Output.

  Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start port information, etc.) to the hall computer of the game hall through the external terminal board 160. Store in port output request buffer.

  In the present embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” are output to the outside as jackpot information, so that an external electronic device (data display device) connected to the pachinko machine 1 is output. Can provide various jackpot information (external information signal output means). In other words, the jackpot information is divided into a plurality of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” and output, so that the type of jackpot (winning type) from these combinations can be tabulated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) or internal Recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or shortened state of symbol variation time, or generate a small hit (a hit where the condition device does not work) that is not classified as a “big hit” even if it is not winning Can be aggregated and managed. Based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each jackpot is currently hit. Or for each table, it can be recognized whether or not the current symbol variation time is in a shortened state. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (set of ON or OFF) of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” in detail.

  Step S209: The main control CPU 72 executes test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, jackpot, probability variation function in operation, time reduction function in operation). These are stored in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main controller 70.

  Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes display output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol. The lighting state of the operation memory lamp 35a, the game state display device 38, etc. is controlled. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the previous special symbol game process (step S205) or the normal symbol game process (step S206). The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data to be applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode of performing symbol variation display, stop display, working memory number display, game state display, etc.).

  Step S211: The main control CPU 72 executes output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208). Further, the main control CPU 72 outputs the drive signals, test signals, and the like of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the special prize opening solenoid 90 stored in the port output request buffer together.

  Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this processing, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command (command necessary for presentation control) that the main control CPU 72 should transmit to the presentation control device 124 in the command buffer. Output port.

  Step S213: The main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored by the current CTC interrupt.

  In the present embodiment, an example is given in which the processing (game control program module) of steps S205 to S212 is executed as a timer interrupt processing. However, these processings are executed by being incorporated in the main loop of the CPU. There is also a programming example.

  Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores a value (01H) for designating the end of interrupt in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

  Step S215, Step S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. Thereafter, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the switch input event process (step S204 in FIG. 34). Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input (a first event occurs) from the right start winning port switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 and executes the first special symbol memory update process. Specific processing contents will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

  Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input (second event occurs) from the left start winning port switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the second special symbol memory update process. Here again, the details of the specific processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of a winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

  Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the count switch 84 corresponding to the big winning opening. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S20 and executes a large winning mouth count process. In the big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the variable winning device 30 every round during the big hit game. On the other hand, if no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

  Step S22: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a passage detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24 and executes the normal symbol memory update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol working memories is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit number, obtains a random number per normal symbol To do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the normal symbol operating memory number by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 34).

[First special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 35). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S30: First, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (the number of sets) of big hit determination random numbers and big hit symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. That is, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into four sections (for example, 2 bytes each) for each symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and each section contains a big hit decision random number and a big hit symbol random number. Each can be stored as a set. At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 35). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

  Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol working memory number. The first special symbol operation memory number counter is stored, for example, in the operation memory number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the counter value added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is controlled by the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 34).

  Step S32: The main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The random value is acquired by specifying the pin address of the random number generator 75. In the case where the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address designation is performed twice for each upper byte and lower byte. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of the random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S34: The main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number from the random number counter area for variation in the RAM 76 as random number values related to the variation condition of the first special symbol (lottery element storage means, variation Pattern determination element acquisition means). Similarly, these random number values are acquired by designating the address of the random number counter area for variation. When the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, it saves them in the transfer destination address.

  Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number together to a random number storage area used in common in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, These random numbers are stored as a set in an empty section in the area (storage means). The order (for example, first to eighth) is set in the plurality of sections. If all the first to eighth sections are empty at this stage, the random numbers are stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to eighth sections are empty, the random numbers are stored in order from the second section. However, regarding the first special symbol, only four sections can be used (the same applies to the second special symbol). Therefore, even if there is an empty section, if four sections are already used for the first special symbol, no more random numbers of the first special symbol are stored. Note that the random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

  Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current game management state (internal state) is after the start of a specific round that is a big hit. If it is before the start of a specific round that is a big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If it is after the start of a specific round of big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the pre-reading effect is not performed after the start of the specific round during the big hit. The specific round can be 6 rounds for 16 rounds probable big hits and 2 rounds for 4 rounds probable big hits.

  Step S37: If the current game management state (internal state) is before the start of the specific round that is a big hit (Step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes the effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the first special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number of the first special symbol respectively acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, and thereby the production contents This is for determination (so-called “look ahead”). The specific processing contents will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S38: After returning from the at-acquisition effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 next sets the upper bytes (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the first special symbol”. Since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), the upper byte is combined with the lower byte, for example. Will be generated.

  Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. Specifically, for the preceding value (for example, “BBH”) of the upper byte representing the type of command, a 1-word length in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte. A production command is generated. At this time, for the lower byte, the second place is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “result (change information) due to increase in number of working memories”. That is, if the lower byte is “01H”, it indicates that the current working memory number has become “01H” as a result of increasing by one from the previous working memory number “00H”. Similarly, if the lower byte is “02H” to “04H”, it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers “01H” to “03H”, so that the current working memory number is “02H” to “02H”. 04H ". The preceding value “BBH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

  Step S39: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the first special symbol. This process is for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command generated in the previous step S38, the effect command for increasing the number of working memories generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning tone control command to the effect control device 124. (Memory number notification means).

  When the above procedure is finished or the first special symbol operation memory number has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 35).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 35). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol actuated memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of jackpot determination random numbers and jackpot symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 35). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 and thereafter.

  Step S41: The main control CPU 72 increments the second special symbol working memory number by one (increments the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter). Similarly to the previous step S31 (FIG. 36), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled by the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 34) based on the counter value added here. Will be.

  Step S42: The main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method for acquiring the random number value is the same as step S32 (FIG. 36) described above.

  Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S33 (FIG. 36) described above.

  Step S44: The main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number regarding the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (the lottery element storage means, the variation pattern determination element Acquisition). The acquisition of these random values is also performed in the same manner as step S34 (FIG. 36) described above.

  Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number and variation pattern determination random number together to the random number storage area used in common in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, These random numbers are stored as a set in an empty section in the area (storage means). The storage method is the same as step S35 (FIG. 36) described above.

  Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current game management state (internal state) is after the start of a specific round that is a big hit. If it is before the start of the specific round that is a big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. On the contrary, if it is after the start of the specific round that is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the pre-reading effect is not performed after the start of the specific round during the big hit.

  Step S46: When the current game management state (internal state) is before the start of the specific round that is a big hit (Step S45a: No), the main control CPU 72 next executes the effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the second special symbol To do. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of the change) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol obtained in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, It is for judging. The specific processing contents will be described later.

  Step S47: After returning from the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU 72 sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the second special symbol”. Similarly, since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous effect determination processing at the time of acquisition (step S46), for example, one word is synthesized by combining the upper byte with the lower byte. A long command will be generated.

  Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for increasing the number of working memories with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word-length production command in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) representing the command type. Is generated. Similarly, for the second special symbol, the second place of the lower byte is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “a result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)”. it can. The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is an operating memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S49: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the second special symbol. As a result, preparation for transmitting a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when increasing the number of operating memories, a start opening winning sound control command, and the like regarding the second special symbol to the effect control device 124 is performed (memory number notifying means). . When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 35).

[Acquisition process during acquisition]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 performs this acquisition effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 36, step S46 in FIG. 37) (predetermined determination). means). As described above, this processing is executed for each of the first special symbol (when winning the right start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when winning the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to a process related to the first special symbol and a process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the contents of the processing will be described along each procedure.

  Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower byte (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (point determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value of the command (at the time of loss).

  Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random value. The random numbers to be loaded here are those stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 36) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 37). .

  Step S54: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determining means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is defined in advance according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

  Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a variation pattern information preliminary determination process at the time of deviation (variation pattern preliminary determination means, destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the variation pattern destination determination command described above for the variation time at the time of disconnection. The change pattern destination determination command generated here includes a change time (or a change time set according to various conditions such as the operation state of the change time shortening function and the total number of stored first special symbols and second special symbols) (or (Variation pattern number) and determination information on the presence or absence of reach variation are reflected. For example, if the current state is when the “time reduction function” is activated, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the “out-of-reach fluctuation fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)” based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether there is. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to “outlier reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “short-time / non-shortening fluctuation time”. In the case of reach variation, it is also possible to determine a “reach group (type of reach)” from the reach mode random number and generate a variation pattern destination determination command from the result. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time does not correspond to “outlier reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to, for example, “short and medium short fluctuation time depending on the total number of storages”. To do. Alternatively, if the current state is when the “time reduction function” is not in operation (non-time reduction state), the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the “normal deviation reach fluctuation” based on the loaded reach determination random number. It is judged whether it is a thing. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to “normally deviation reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normally deviation reach fluctuation time”. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to “normal deviation reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normal deviation fluctuation time for each total storage number”. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above.

  Step S81: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes pre-determination processing for fluctuation pattern information when the high probability time reduction state is lost (fluctuation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines in advance whether or not the non-winning variation pattern after special reach is selected when the state shifts to the high probability time reduction state, and generates a variation pattern destination determination command. Specifically, it is determined in advance whether or not the non-winning variation pattern after special reach is selected using a variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 43) at the time of loss in the night mode described later. As a result, before the new lottery element is actually consumed, it is determined whether or not the non-winning variation pattern after special reach is selected. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above.

  When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the acquisition-time effect determination process, and returns to the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 36) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 37). On the other hand, if it is determined in the previous step S54 that the loaded random number is not within the range of the winning value but is within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S66.

  Step S66: The main control CPU 72 sets the comparison value for low probability (normal time) in the A register. The low probability comparison value is defined in advance according to the winning probability at the low probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  Step S67: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot determination process at a low probability. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is outside the range of the winning value. That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random number value from the comparison value set in the low probability state. Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the operation result is a negative value (<0) from the value of the flag register, and as a result, the loaded random number is outside or within the range of the winning value. Determine whether. Thereby, the main control CPU 72 can determine in advance the result of the internal lottery when the state shifts to the low probability state. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a low-probability lottery result destination determination command reflecting the previous determination result, and the generated low-probability lottery result destination determination command is a production command output setting process (steps S39 and S49). Is set in the send buffer.

  Step S68: The main control CPU 72 sets a comparative value for high probability. As a result, the low-probability comparison value set in the previous step S66 is rewritten. The high probability comparison value is defined in advance according to the winning probability at the high probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  Step S69: The main control CPU 72 executes a high probability jackpot determination process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is outside the range of the winning value. That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random number value from the comparison value set in the high and low probability state. Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the operation result is a negative value (<0) from the value of the flag register, and as a result, the loaded random number is outside or within the range of the winning value. Determine whether. Thereby, the main control CPU 72 can determine in advance the result of the internal lottery when the state is shifted to the high probability state. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a high-probability lottery result destination determination command reflecting the previous determination result, and the generated high-probability lottery result destination determination command is a production command output setting process (steps S39 and S49). Is set in the send buffer.

  Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the big hit type (winning type) at that time based on the big hit symbol random number paired with the big hit decision random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random number for each symbol stored in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 36) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 37). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54 described above, and from the result, it is determined whether the jackpot type corresponds to “non-probable (normal) symbol” or “probable variation”. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S78.

  Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. As the special symbol destination determination value, for example, “01H” is set when it corresponds to “non-probable (normal) symbol”, and “A0H” is set when it corresponds to “probable variation”. In any case, by setting the lower byte data here, the standard lower byte data “00H” set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

  Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes big hit hour fluctuation pattern information preliminary determination processing (fluctuation pattern preliminary determination means, destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-described variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the big hit. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, for example, prior determination information related to the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of big hit is reflected. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above.

  Step S79a: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a high probability time shortened state big hit variation pattern information preliminary determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines in advance whether or not a variation pattern after special reach is selected when the state shifts to the high probability time reduction state, and generates a variation pattern destination determination command. Specifically, it is determined in advance whether or not the special reach post-change pattern is selected using a big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (see FIG. 49) in the night mode described later. As a result, before the new lottery element is actually consumed, it is determined whether or not the special reach post-change pattern is selected. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above.

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 36) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 37).

[Special design game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 34) will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game process. The special symbol game process includes an execution selection process (step S1000), a special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), a special symbol change process (step S3000), a special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and a variable winning device management process. This is a configuration including a subroutine (program module) group of (Step S5000). First, the basic flow of the special symbol game process will be described along each process.

  Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process as the return destination address in the stack pointer.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination differs depending on the progress of the process performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol (both the first special symbol and the second special symbol) has not yet started the variable display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the start condition (first start condition, second The main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000) as the next jump destination assuming that the start condition is satisfied. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation processing (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol variation is in progress. If the process has been completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop displaying process (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified by the “jump table” and the process is selected. However, apart from such a selection method, a “process flag”, a “process selection flag”, or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects a process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process in a single way, and at the top step, the conditional branch (continuation / return) is performed by referring to the flag one by one. However, in the selection method of this embodiment, the main control There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

  Step S2000: In the special symbol variation pre-processing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation to prepare conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S3000: In the special symbol variation processing, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (0th to 7th) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Similarly, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED. However, the pattern of the drive signal is constant, whereby a special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Step S5000: The variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode (a mode other than non-winning) in the previous special symbol stop display process. For example, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “16 rounds big hit” or “4 rounds big hit”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state (special gaming state advantageous to the player) occurs. To do. During the big hit game, the jump destination is set in the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbol variation display is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the large winning opening solenoid 90 is excited for a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds or until 9 winnings are counted) for a predetermined number of continuous operations (for example, 4 times, 16 times), As a result, the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). In the meantime, by allowing the variable winning device 30 to win the game balls intensively, the player is given an opportunity to collect a lot of prize balls (special game execution means). Note that the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30 at the time of the big win is referred to as “round”, and if the total number of continuous operations is 16 times, these may be collectively referred to as “16 rounds”. In the present embodiment, not only “16 round jackpot” or “4 round jackpot” but also a plurality of types of two round jackpots are provided as jackpot types. In addition, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided for “16 rounds big hit” and “4 rounds big hit”.

  Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30 for one round. Each time it is finished, the value of the round number counter is incremented by one. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 34). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (big player) only for that round.

  When the big hit game ends, the main control CPU 72 changes the state after the big hit game (high probability state, time reduction state) based on the game state flag (probability variation function operation flag, time reduction function operation flag) ( High probability time shortening state transition means). In the “high probability state”, the probability variation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes, for example, about ten times higher than usual (specific game state transition means, high probability state transition means, probability state setting means). In the “time reduction state”, the time reduction function is activated, and the special symbol fluctuation time is a normal length (for example, about 2 to 12 seconds depending on the total stored number; except for the case where the reach fluctuation is performed. ) Is shifted to a state set to a length (for example, about 1.5 seconds) in which the variation time is shortened compared to the non-time shortened state. In addition, while the time reduction function is activated, the special symbol variation time is shortened, and the normal symbol lottery has a high probability (for example, low probability of about 25/251 → about 249/251). The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (for example, about 10 seconds when not in operation → about 1 second) and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is extended (for example, about 0.3 seconds when inactive → 2. Since it is extended to about 5 seconds), and the number of times of opening increases (for example, it increases from 1 to 2 when it is not in operation), the game ball is fired for a long time (all memory of normal symbols is interrupted and variable start) The operation memory of the second special symbol is less likely to be interrupted (so-called electric chew support) as long as it is not interrupted for a period of time that the winning device 28 stops operating). Note that the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state” may be transferred to only one of them in terms of control, or may be transferred in accordance with both of them.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, for the above-mentioned “16 round jackpot”, for example, (1) “16 round probability variation big hit 1” and (2) “16 round probability variation big hit 2” are provided as a plurality of winning types (more than this) May be). In addition, for the above-mentioned “4 rounds big hit”, for example, (3) “4 rounds probable big hit 1” and (4) “4 rounds probable big hit 2” are provided as a plurality of winning types (even if there are more than this) Good). Further, in the present embodiment, (5) “2 round probability variation big hit” is provided as a plurality of winning types (special winning types) (there may be more).

  The winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, “16 round probability variation jackpot 1” corresponds to a jackpot of “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, and “16 round probability variation jackpot 2” corresponds to a jackpot of “16 round probability variation symbol 2”. Further, “4 round probability variation jackpot 1” corresponds to the jackpot of “4 round probability variation symbol 1”, and “4 round probability variation jackpot 2” corresponds to the jackpot of “4 round probability variation symbol 2”. Further, “2 round probability variation big hit” corresponds to the big hit of “2 round probability variation big symbol”. For this reason, in the following description, “winning type” is appropriately referred to as “winning symbol”.

[16 rounds probable design]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “16 round probability variation 1” or “16 round probability variation 2” in the previous special symbol stop display processing, the opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state Occurs (special game execution means). In this case, the special winning opening is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds) from the first round, and this continues until the 16th round. These “16-round probability variation 1” or “16-round probability variation 2” jackpot games each give 16 rounds (prize balls) to the player. Further, when a predetermined number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) is generated within one round, the big winning opening is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse. Then, for example, by operating the “probability changing function” after the big hit game is finished, a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player as a result. Also, in this case, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, the “time reduction function” is activated after the big hit game is completed, and the time is shifted to “time reduction state”. The privilege to be given is given to the player.

[4 rounds probable variation]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “4 round probability variation 1” or “4 round probability variation 2” in the previous special symbol stop display processing, the opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state Occurs (special game execution means). In this case, the winning opening is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, 29.0 seconds at the longest), and this continues until the fourth round. Each of these “4-round probability variation symbol 1” or “4-round probability variation symbol 2” jackpot games will give the player 4 balls (prize balls) for the round. Further, when a predetermined number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) is generated within one round, the big winning opening is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse. Then, for example, by operating the “probability changing function” after the big hit game is finished, a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player as a result. Also, in this case, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, the “time reduction function” is activated after the big hit game is completed, and the time is shifted to “time reduction state”. The privilege to be given is given to the player.

[2-round probability variable design]
Alternatively, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the “two-round probability variation symbol” mode in the previous special symbol stop display process, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to a short-term big hit gaming state occurs. However, since the two-round jackpot game ends in an extremely short time compared to the 16-round jackpot game and the four-round jackpot game, there is hardly any winning in the big winning opening. Therefore, the big hit game of “2 round probability variation design” is completed within a short period of time without giving a substantial play (prize ball) to the player. Instead, if the winning type corresponds to “2 round probability variation symbol”, for example, the “probability variation function” is activated after the jackpot game is ended, and as a result, the privilege of shifting to the “high probability state” Granted to a person. Such a “two-round probability variation pattern” gives the player the impression that a “high probability state” suddenly occurs without going through a clear big hit game. Here, an example is given in which the opening time is set to an extremely short time, but even in a 2-round big hit game, for example, multiple (for example, about 9) game balls are won in one round. It is good also as setting sufficient open time which becomes possible. In this case, the player can enjoy the privilege of shifting to the “high probability state” after giving a privilege of paying out a certain amount of prize balls. Further, in this embodiment, when the “non-time shortened state” corresponds to the “two-round probability variation symbol”, the transition to the “time shortened state” is not performed. When it corresponds to “design”, it is decided to shift to “time reduction state”.

  In any case, the winning symbol is any of the above-mentioned “16 round probability variation 1”, “16 round probability variation 2”, “4 round probability variation 1”, “4 round probability variation 2” or “2 round probability variation 2”. If this is the case, the player is given a privilege to shift the internal state to the “high probability state” after the big hit game. In the “high probability state”, an internal lottery is won, and the winning symbols at that time are “16 round probability variation 1”, “16 round probability variation 2”, “4 round probability variation 1”, “4 round probability variation 2”. "Or" 2 round probability variation symbol ", the" high probability state "continues (restarts) after the big hit game ends.

[Small hits]
In the present embodiment, small wins are provided as winning types other than non-winning. When winning a small winning game, a small winning game is performed separately from the big winning game, and the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed (special game executing means). That is, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit state in the special symbol stop display process, the small hit game (the variable winning device 30 is activated in the normal probability state or the high probability state). (Game) is executed (in this embodiment, no small hit is set for the second special symbol). In such a small winning game, the variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), but hardly wins in the big winning opening as in the two-round big winning game. In addition, even if the small hit game ends, the “probability change function” does not operate, and the “time reduction function” does not operate, so it goes to the “high probability state” or “time reduction state”. The privilege to be transferred is not granted (it is not a prerequisite for that). Also, even if you win a small hit in the “high probability state”, the “high probability state” will not end after the game of that small hit, and even if you win a small hit in the “time reduction state” The “time reduction state” does not end after the end of the small hit game (except when the upper limit is reached). In the present embodiment, the game specification for setting a small hit is used, but it may be a game specification for not setting a small hit.

[Special symbol change pre-treatment]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the first special symbol working memory number or the second special symbol working memory number remains (greater than 0). This confirmation can be made with reference to the value of the working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes a demonstration setting process in step S2500.

  Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demonstration effect command. The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 34). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. When returning, it returns to the end address as described above (and so on).

  On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2200.

  Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 reads the lottery random numbers (big hit decision random number, big hit symbol random number) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 in the order of acquisition. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads and erases (consumes) the random numbers in order from the first section, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ) The read random number is stored, for example, in another temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. In the present embodiment, random numbers are read in the order stored (acquired) in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts one value of the working memory number counter (the one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol which has been subjected to the random number shift) stored in the RAM 76, and after the subtraction Is set to “Number of working memories at start of change”. Thereby, the display mode of the number stored by the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a changes (decreases by 1) in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 34). . When the procedure so far is finished, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

  Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of the big hit value and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (internal lottery execution means). The range of the jackpot value set at this time is different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated). In the high probability state, the range of the jackpot value is expanded to about 10 times that of the normal probability state. The If the random value read at this time is included in the range of the big hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

  When the above big hit flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 sets the range of the small hit value next in the same big hit determination process, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (lottery execution). means). The “small hit” here is other than non-winning (out of), but is different from “big hit”. In other words, “big hit” generates an opportunity (game milestone) to shift to the above “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, but “small hit” does not generate such an opportunity. However, “small hit” is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the variable winning device 30 as in the case of “big hit”. The range of the small hit value set at this time may be different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated), or may be the same. In any case, if the read random number value is included in the range of the small hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random value.

  Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set for the big hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2402.

  Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine the big hit (for example, 01H is set) or the small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without separately preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag.

  Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes an off-time stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 34).

  In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always set to one segment (the central bar). It is possible to fix the stop symbol number data to one value (for example, 64H) by keeping only the “−”) lighting display. In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

  Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a deviation variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the fluctuation pattern number at the time of deviation for the special symbol (fluctuation pattern determination means, fluctuation time determination means). The variation pattern number is used to distinguish the variation display type (pattern) of the special symbol or to correspond to the variation time required for the variation display. The fluctuation time at the time of loss varies depending on whether or not it is in the above “time shortening state”, and also depends on the total number of stored first special symbols and second special symbols at the start of fluctuation (at the start of fluctuation display). . In this process, the main control CPU 72 loads the game state flag, checks whether or not the current state is the “time reduction state”, and also determines the value of the first special symbol operation memory number and the second special symbol operation. Load the value of each memory number. In the “time reduction state”, except for the case where reach fluctuation is basically performed, the fluctuation time at the time of loss is set to a shortened time (for example, about 4.0 to 1.5 seconds depending on the total number of memories). The Even if not in the “time shortening state”, the fluctuation time at the time of loss may be shortened based on the total stored number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, except when the reach variation is performed. Note that the symbol stop display time at the time of disconnection is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is a non-winning result, for example, a “reach effect” is generated and the control is performed so that the “reach effect” is not generated. It is said. The “variation pattern selection table at the time of loss” preliminarily defines variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects such as “non-reach effect” and “reach effect”. One of the fluctuation patterns is selected from the inside. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, story reach production, and the like.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of modes corresponding to the gaming state are prepared, and the contents of the variation pattern selected according to the staying mode are different. The following is an overview of the various modes.

(1) Normal mode The special symbol lottery is in a low probability state, and the normal symbol lottery is also in a low probability state (a state without electric Chu support). When a player starts playing with the pachinko machine 1, the game proceeds from the normal mode.
(2) Festival mode The special symbol lottery is in a low probability state or a high probability state, and the normal symbol lottery is in a low probability state (a state without electric support). The low probability state festival mode is a low probability festival mode, and the high probability state festival mode is a high probability festival mode.

(3) Fireworks mode High probability state for special symbol lottery, and high probability state for normal symbol lottery (state with electric Chu support).
(4) Night mode It is a high probability state regarding the special symbol lottery, and is also a high probability state (state with electric Chu support) regarding the normal symbol lottery. The night mode is the same as the fireworks mode as an internal state, but is an eight-variation limited chance zone that may shift after the big hit game ends.

  These various modes are modes managed by the main control CPU 72, and the main control CPU 72 determines a variation pattern according to the stay mode. Confirmation of the current stay mode can be realized by confirming the main control mode status. Here, the “main control mode status” is a variable that holds identification numbers corresponding to various modes, and the value is set after the end of the big hit game. Updated. A unique identification number is assigned to each mode, and the main control CPU 72 can confirm the current stay mode by referring to the value of the main control mode status.

[Example of variation pattern selection table for loss]
FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table (normal mode / festival mode) at the time of loss.
This selection table is a table that is used when the normal mode or the festival mode is off (when it is not won) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “1” to “8” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  Variation pattern numbers “1” to “5” correspond to variation patterns (basic variation patterns) that are out of reach without performing a reach effect, and variation pattern numbers “6” to “8” are out of reach. Corresponds to the fluctuation pattern (basic fluctuation pattern). Note that such a variation pattern selection table is also used in the prior determination process of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition (FIG. 38) (the same applies to the big hit). The variation pattern selection table may have different table contents depending on the number of operation memories at the start of variation.

  Here, the length of the set fluctuation time is greatly different between the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern. That is, the “non-reach variation pattern” basically corresponds to a short variation time (for example, about 3.0 seconds to 12.0 seconds depending on the number of working memories), whereas the “reach variation pattern” This corresponds to a long fluctuation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 150 seconds) more than twice as long.

  Then, the main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, The corresponding variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determining means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table (fireworks mode) at the time of loss.
This selection table is a table used when the fireworks mode is off (when it is not won) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “21” to “28” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  Fluctuation pattern numbers “21” to “25” correspond to fluctuation patterns (basic fluctuation patterns) that are out of reach without a reach effect, and fluctuation pattern numbers “26” to “28” are off after reach. Corresponds to the fluctuation pattern (basic fluctuation pattern). However, since the variation pattern numbers “21” to “25” are non-reach variations due to time shortening variations, a shortened variation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) is set as the variation time in the normal state. .

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “22” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating an example of a deviation variation pattern selection table (night mode).
This selection table is a table to be used at the time of losing in the night mode (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “41” to “48” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  Variation pattern numbers “41” to “45” correspond to variation patterns (special variation patterns) that are out of reach without a reach effect, and variation pattern numbers “46” to “48” are after special reach. It corresponds to a fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation pattern) that becomes a deviation. However, since the variation pattern numbers “41” to “45” are non-reach variations due to time shortening variations, a shortened variation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) is set as the variation time in the normal state. .

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “42” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining the variation time of the special symbol in the non-time shortened state.
In the present embodiment, the variation time of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the start of the variation (after the memory shift process), except when the reach variation is performed. Is changed based on the total stored number (so-called total number of pending). This table is applied when the variation patterns 1 to 5 in the above-described variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 41) are selected. Specific numerical values are as follows.

[Common to the 1st special design and the 2nd special design]
(Total memory number 0) Fluctuation time: about 12 seconds (Total memory number 1) Fluctuation time: About 10 seconds (Total memory number 2) Fluctuation time: About 10 seconds (Total memory number 3) Fluctuation time: About 2.0 seconds (Total memory number 4) Fluctuation time: About 2.0 seconds (Total memory number 5) Fluctuation time: About 2.0 seconds (Total memory number 6) Fluctuation time: About 2.0 seconds (Total memory number 7) Fluctuation time About 6.0 seconds The above total memory number “0-7” is obtained after subtracting the first special symbol working memory number or the second special symbol working memory number in the special symbol memory area shift process (step S2200). It is the sum of the values. Therefore, the total memory number before the memory shift (the working memory number counter is subtracted) in the same process is “1-8”.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the total stored number at the start of variation is 3 to 6, for example, the normal time set to the normal length as the variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol Instead of the fluctuation time (10 seconds to 12 seconds), a first reduction fluctuation time (about 2.0 seconds) that is shorter than the normal fluctuation time is set (first reduction fluctuation time setting means).

  On the other hand, when the total stored number at the start of variation is, for example, 7 (eight specified values before the storage shift), the variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is shorter than the normal variation time. However, a second shortened variation time (about 6.0 seconds) longer than the first shortened variation time is set (second shortened variation time setting means).

  As described above, the second shortened variation time is set when the total number of memories at the start of variation is seven for the following reason. In other words, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the time reduction state or the non-time reduction state is set, the ball distribution device 200 wins the right start winning opening 26 and the variable start winning device 28 (left start). It is possible to alternately generate a winning to the winning opening 28a) (or to promote the generation of a winning alternately). For this reason, if the launch of the game ball is not particularly interrupted, the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the number of working memories of the second special symbol each reach the maximum value (4), so that in the normal state It is quite possible that the total number of memories reaches a specified value (eight of the sum of the maximum values) during the game. At this time, it is also possible to execute a specific effect for emphasizing that the total stored number has reached the specified value. In the present embodiment, the reason why the second shortened variation time is set when the total number of memories at the start of variation is seven is to secure a production scale when executing such a specific production.

[Refer to Fig. 40: Special symbol change pre-processing]
The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the big hit determination result is out of place (in the case other than non-winning), but the determination result is a big hit (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes). The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of jackpot will be described.

  Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type defining means). For this reason, the main control CPU 72 can determine the type of winning symbol based on the big hit symbol random number from the stored contents by referring to the big hit symbol stop selection table in the big hit symbol stop determination process.

[Winning pattern at the time of big hit]
In the present embodiment, there are five types of winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The five types are “16-round probability variation 1”, “16-round probability variation 2”, “4-round probability variation 1”, “4-round probability variation 2”, and “2-round probability variation 2”. Each of the five types of winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, “16 round probability variation 1”, “16 round probability variation 1a”, “16 round probability variation 1b”, “16 round probability variation 1c”, and so on.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same type of winning symbol selected at the time of the big winning of the internal lottery corresponding to each. That is, “16 round probability variation 1”, “16 round probability variation symbol 2”, “4 round probability variation” both at the time of the big winning of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol and at the time of the big winning of the internal lottery corresponding to the second special symbol. One of “symbol 1”, “four-round probability variation symbol 2”, and “two-round probability variation symbol” is selected. However, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the objects that can be selected as the winning symbols depending on whether the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First Special Symbol Big Stop Stop Symbol Selection Table]
FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a configuration column of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the winning symbol type with reference to the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table shown in FIG.

  In the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution value by winning symbol, and each distribution value is “54”, “4”, “29”, “0.5”. , “12.5” corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100. In the second column from the left, “16 round probability variation 1”, “16 round probability variation 2”, “4 round probability variation 1”, “4 round probability variation 2”, “ The “2 round probability variation” is shown. That is, at the big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of “16 round probability variable symbol 1” is 54/100 (= 54%), and the ratio of “16 round probability variable symbol 2” is selected. It is 4/100 (= 4%). In addition, the ratio that “4 round probability variation 1” is selected is 29/100 (= 29%), and the rate that “4 round probability variation 2” is selected is 0.5 / 100 (= 0.5%). ). In addition, the ratio at which the “2-round probability variation pattern” is selected is 12.5th (= 12.5%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using a jackpot symbol random number. Therefore, the selection ratio of the probability variation symbol for the first special symbol as a whole is 100%.

  In any case, if the current jackpot result corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table To select the winning symbol selectively. Further, in the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value “B1H” of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, “03H”, and “04H” in the lower byte respectively represent the types of winning symbols corresponding to the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, and “16 round probability variable symbol 1” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as “B1H00H” Will be.

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a configuration column of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the winning symbol type with reference to the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table shown in FIG.

  In the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column also shows the distribution value for each winning symbol, and each distribution value “54”, “4”, “29”, “0. “5” and “12.5” correspond to the ratio when the denominator is 100. Similarly, in the second column from the left, “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, “16 round probability variation symbol 2”, “4 round probability variation symbol 1”, “4 round probability variation symbol 2” corresponding to each distribution value, “Two-round probability variation pattern” is shown. That is, at the big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting “16 round probability variation symbol 1” is 54/100 (= 54%), and “16 round probability variation symbol 2” is selected. The ratio is 4/100 (= 4%). In addition, the ratio that “4 round probability variation 1” is selected is 29/100 (= 29%), and the rate that “4 round probability variation 2” is selected is 0.5 / 100 (= 0.5%). ). In addition, the ratio at which the “2-round probability variation pattern” is selected is 12.5th (= 12.5%). Therefore, also for the second special symbol, the selection ratio of the probability variation symbol is 100% as a whole.

  When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol with the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Again, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value. Among these, the MODE value “B2H” of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of the second special symbol is the current winning symbol. It represents that. Further, the EVENT values “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, “03H”, and “04H” in the lower byte respectively represent the types of winning symbols corresponding to the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol, and “16 round probability variable symbol 1” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command is described as “B2H00H”. Become.

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

  In the present embodiment, since the working memory can be increased at the same pace as the first special symbol even during the second special symbol from the normal game using the ball sorter 200, the first special symbol and the first special symbol as described above. The same selection ratio is adopted for both of the second special symbols without making a difference in the selection ratio of the winning symbols.

[Refer to Fig. 40: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. The main control CPU 72 sets the determined variation time value in the variation timer, and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. In general, in the case of big hit reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

  In the present embodiment, if the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a big hit of 16 rounds or a big hit of 4 rounds, for example, a “reach effect” is generated to produce a big hit. In the “big hit winning variation pattern selection table”, variation patterns corresponding to multiple types of “reach effects” are defined, and if it hits 16 round big hits or 4 round big hits, one of them is selected. Will be selected. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, story reach production, and the like. Also, when winning with the time shortening function activated, a variation pattern with a short variation time (a variation pattern without a reach effect) may be selected without selecting a variation pattern with a long variation time. Good.

[Example of big hit fluctuation pattern selection table]
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (normal mode / festival mode).
This selection table is a table used when winning in the normal mode or the festival mode (variation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “13” to “20” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “13” to “20” all correspond to the variation pattern (basic variation pattern) that is a hit when the reach effect is performed. Note that such a variation pattern selection table is also used in the prior determination process of the acquisition effect determination process (FIG. 38) (hereinafter the same).

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “14” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating an example of a big hit hour variation pattern selection table (fireworks mode).
This selection table is a table used when winning in the fireworks mode (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. The “variation pattern numbers” “33” to “40” are assigned to the respective “comparison values”.

  The variation pattern numbers “33” to “40” all correspond to the variation pattern (basic variation pattern) that is a hit when the reach effect is performed.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “34” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of a big hit hour variation pattern selection table (night mode).
This selection table is a table used when winning in the night mode (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “53” to “60” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “53” to “60” all correspond to the variation pattern (special variation pattern) that is a hit when the special reach effect is performed.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “54” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[Refer to Fig. 40: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit other setting process. In this processing, the main control CPU 72 determines that the winning symbol type (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2410 is “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, “16 round probability variation symbol 2”, “4 round probability variation symbol 1”. In either case of “4 round probability variation 2” or “2 round probability variation”, the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set in the flag area of the RAM 76 as a gaming state flag (high probability state transition means , Probability variation function operating means, probability state setting means).

  In addition, the main control CPU 72 determines that the winning symbol type (hit stop symbol number) determined in the previous step S2410 is “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, “16 round probability variation symbol 2”, “4 round probability variation symbol 1”, “ For all winning symbols of “4 round probability variation 2” or “2 round probability variation”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value (01H) of the time shortening function operation flag as a gaming state flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 (time shortening state) Transition means, time shortening function actuating means). However, the “2-round probability variation symbol” is limited to the case where the time is shortened.

  In the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the big hit time stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of the big hit) together with the stop symbol command (at the time of the big hit). The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, processing for small hits will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at small hit) based on the big hit symbol random number. Similarly, the relationship between the big winning symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hitting is preliminarily defined in the special symbol selection table at small hitting (winning type defining means). In this embodiment, in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is determined using the big hit symbol random number, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Winning pattern for small hits]
In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hitting is only one type of “twice open small hitting symbol”. However, other types such as “one time opening small hit symbol” and “three times opening small hit symbol” may be prepared. As described above, “small hit” as a result of the internal lottery is not an opportunity for the subsequent state to change to “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, and thus is essential for this type of pachinko machine. A “one-time small hit symbol” can be provided without being bound by the definition of “two rounds (two times open) or more”.

  Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern determination means, variation time determination means). ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined variation time value in the variation timer, and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, in the case of a small hit, a variation pattern equivalent to that at the time of variation is selected.

  Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hitting and other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the stop symbol number at the time of small hit. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects the fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (out of time / hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets a special symbol variation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a change start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This variation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination and returns to the special symbol game process.

[FIG. 39: Special symbol changing process, special symbol stop display process]
In the special symbol fluctuation processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer according to the passage of time (clock pulse count number or interrupt counter value). Decrement the counter value. The main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol variation display as described above until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. When the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display in-progress process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

  In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol stop display based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (steps S2404, S2407, and S2410 in FIG. 40). The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag.

[Special symbol memory area shift processing]
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift process. When the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than “0” in the previous special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 40), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 refers to the random number storage area and confirms whether or not the oldest memory corresponds to the first special symbol. This confirmation can be realized by confirming whether or not a random number corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the first section of the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if it is confirmed that the oldest memory does not correspond to the first special symbol (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S2212.

  Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates the second special symbol as the target special symbol (special symbol to be changed). This designation is performed, for example, by setting “02H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2214: On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the oldest memory corresponds to the first special symbol (Step S2210: Yes), the main control CPU 72 designates the first special symbol as the target special symbol. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting “01H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76. The details of the specific processing are as already described in the previous special symbol change pre-processing.

  Step S2218: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the operation memory counter for the target special symbol designated in either step S2212 or step S2214. For example, if the current target special symbol is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

  Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “the number of operation memories at the start of change (total number of memories)” from the value of the operation memory counter after the subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the value of the operation memory counter is added, and then the “variation start operation memory number (total memory number)” is set. The “actual memory number at start of change (total stored number)” set here is, for example, the time when the change time for each total stored number is set in the change pattern determination process at the time of loss (step S2405 in FIG. 40). Can be referred to.

Step S2222: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the target special symbol is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target special symbol is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for reducing the number of working memories with respect to the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word-length command, but its structure is in contrast to the above-described “effect command when increasing the number of working memories”. That is, the production command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is lower than the value of lower bytes (for example, “00H” to “03H” that represents the number of working memories after reduction with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) of the upper bytes representing the command type. )) And an additional value (for example, “10H”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories accompanying consumption” is further added (logical sum) to the lower byte value. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second value becomes “1” by ORing the added value “10H”, and this value represents “the result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories”. It will be a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is “13H”, it means that the number of working memories up to the previous time “4” (command notation is “14H”) is reduced by one, so that the current working memory number is “3” (command The notation is “13H”). Similarly, if the lower byte is “12H” to “10H”, it means that the number of working memories “3” to “1” up to the previous time (command notation is “13H” to “11H”) is decreased by one respectively. This indicates that the current operation memory number is “2” to “0” (command notation is “12H” to “10H”). The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S2226: When the current target special symbol is the first special symbol (step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for reducing the number of working memories with respect to the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, “BBH”) indicating that the previous value is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the production command for reducing the number of working memories set in the previous step S2224 or step S2226 to the production control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 40).

[Special symbol stop display processing]
Next, FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol stop display process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt period).

  Step S4200: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not yet ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 39) also in the next interrupt cycle, and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display process.

  On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

  Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. Further, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag here.

  Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set. When the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4350.

[When winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to “variable winning device management process”. The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting various functions to non-operation in this processing. Specifically, the probability variation function is deactivated and the time reduction function is deactivated. Thereby, before the special game (big player) is started, the state is shifted to the low probability non-time shortening state.
Step S4400: The main control CPU 72 sets “start of big role (during big hit game)” as an internal state flag for control. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation count status according to the type of the big hit symbol. For example, if the type of jackpot symbol is “16 round probability variation symbol 1” or “16 round probability variation symbol 2”, a value corresponding to “16 rounds” is set in the continuous operation count status. If the type of jackpot symbol is “4 round probability variation symbol 1” or “4 round probability variation symbol 2”, a value corresponding to “4 rounds” is set in the continuous operation count status. Further, if the type of jackpot symbol is “2 round probability variation symbol”, a value corresponding to “2 rounds” is set in the continuous operation count status. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command representing a big hit. The state command representing the big hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S4500: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type of jackpot symbol (stop symbol number) determined in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 40). For example, if the type of jackpot symbol is either “16 round probability variation symbol 1” or “16 round probability variation symbol 2”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “16 rounds”. If the type of jackpot symbol is either “4 round probability variation symbol 1” or “4 round probability variation symbol 2”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “4 rounds”. Further, in the case of “2 round probability variation symbol”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “2 rounds”. The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  When the above procedure is completed at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed in cases other than the big hit.
That is, if the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), it next executes step S4600.

  Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next checks whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. If the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and is simply a deviation (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4602.

  Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol variation pre-processing address as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4605: On the other hand, if the value (01H) of the small hit flag is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “small hit start (medium hit)” as an internal state flag for control. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that a small hit is being made. The state command representing the small hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S4608: The main control CPU 72 executes mode management processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes processing for managing various modes such as the normal mode. The contents of the mode management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step 4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the count-down counter. In the “counting counter”, the counter values are set in the probability variation count area and the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 in the “high probability state” and “time reduction state”. When shifting to the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state”, the count-off counter for the high probability state and the time reduction state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 70 times) and is not a “time reduction state” alone. When the transition is made only to the “high probability state”, the count-off counter for the high probability state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 70 times).

  Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the loaded counter value is zero. At this time, if the count cut counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, when the count cut counter value is not 0 (No), after generating the count cut counter value command, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (subtracts 1) the count-down counter value.
Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result is not zero. As a result of the subtraction, when the value of the number cut counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if the value of the number cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

  Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets a flag at the time of turning off the number of times function. In the present embodiment, the count-off counter for the high probability state and the time reduction state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 70 times), and therefore, the probability variation function operation flag and the time reduction function operation flag are reset. . Note that when the state is shifted to only the “high probability state” instead of the “time reduction state”, the probability variation function operation flag is reset. As a result, the high probability state and the time shortening state are completed through the special symbol stop display. When the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the special symbol game process.

[Mode management processing]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the mode management process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S4660: The main control CPU 72 loads the variation pattern selection counter value from the RAM 76, and checks whether or not the variation pattern selection counter value is greater than “0”. Here, the “variation pattern selection counter value” is a variable that is referred to when various modes managed by the main control CPU 72 are shifted. The setting of the variation pattern selection counter value is performed in a mode setting process (FIG. 60) described later.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0” (step S4660: Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S4662. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is not larger than “0”, for example, when the variation pattern selection counter value is “0” (step S4660: No), the main control CPU 72 The process returns to the special symbol stop display process (FIG. 51).

  Step S4662: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of decrementing (decrementing by 1) the variation pattern selection counter value.

Step S4664: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the variation pattern selection counter value is “0”.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is “0” (step S4664: Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S4666. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is not “0” (step S4664: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol stop display processing (FIG. 51).

Step S4666: The main control CPU 72 executes main control mode status update processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes processing for updating the set value of the main control mode status. The contents of the main control mode status update process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol stop display process (FIG. 51).

[Main control mode status update processing]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the main control mode status update process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S4700: The main control CPU 72 loads the main control mode status. Here, as described above, the “main control mode status” is a variable that holds identification numbers corresponding to various modes, and the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the main control mode status to indicate the current stay. You can check the mode.

Step S4702: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the main control mode status indicates the value of the night mode.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the main control mode status indicates the value of the night mode (step S4702: Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S4704. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the main control mode status does not indicate the value of the night mode (step S4702: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the mode management process (FIG. 52).

  Step S4704: The main control CPU 72 sets a value corresponding to the night mode in the main control mode status. As a result, the special variation state in the night mode ends, and the mode shifts to the fireworks mode.

When the main control mode status value is updated, the main control CPU 72 generates a main control mode status command reflecting the value. The main control mode status command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 34).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the mode management process (FIG. 52).

[Display output management processing]
Next, FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 34) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes a special symbol display setting process (step S1200), a normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), a state display setting process (step S1220), an operation memory display setting process (step S1230), and a continuous operation number display setting. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S1240).

  Among these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the operation memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34, the second, as already described. Generates drive signals to be applied to the LEDs of the special symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation memory number display lamp 35a. And output processing.

  The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal to be applied to each LED of the gaming state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the probability variation state display lamp 38c and the time reduction state display lamp 38d, respectively, according to the value of the probability variation function activation flag or the time reduction function activation flag. For example, if the value (01H) is set in the probability variation function operation flag when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability variation state display lamp 38c. The probability variation state display lamp 38c remains lit until the jackpot game related to the special symbol is started or until the probability variation function is turned off after the variation display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times. (Off) Switchable. On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 turns on the lighting signal for the LED corresponding to the time reduction state display lamp 38d regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Is output.

  The main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the big hit type display lamps 37a, 37b, 37c in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for any one of the big hit type display lamps 37a, 37b, 37c based on the value of the above-mentioned continuous operation number status. At this time, one of the display lamps 37a, 37b, and 37c corresponding to the jackpot symbol designated by the value of the continuous operation number status is the target of outputting the lighting signal. For example, if the value of the continuous operation number status specifies “16 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 37c representing “16 rounds (16R)”. Further, if the value of the continuous operation number status designates “4 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 37 b representing “4 rounds (4R)”. Further, if the value of the continuous operation count status designates “2 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 37 a representing “2 rounds (2R)”.

[Variable winning device management process]
Next, details of the variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart illustrating a configuration example of the variable winning device management process. The variable winning device management process includes a gaming process selection process (step S5100), a special winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200), a special winning opening / closing operation process (step S5300), a special winning opening closing process (step S5400), and an end. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S5500).

  Step S5100: In the game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the variable winning device 30 has not started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and has completed the winning opening opening / closing operation process. Then, the special winning opening closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the big prize opening / closing operation process and the big prize opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 selects an end process (step S5500) as the next jump destination. . Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Big prize opening pattern setting process]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for a special winning opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times that the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed and the time for each opening at the time of big hit or small hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S5202: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current gaming state is a big game, that is, whether or not the big hit flag value (01H) is set in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the value of the big hit flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5204. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit flag is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5212. Note that this procedure may be rewritten to refer to the value of the small hit flag (however, the logic of Yes / No is reversed).

[Procedure for jackpot]
First, the procedure for the big hit is as follows.
Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a design-specific release pattern setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the winning pattern opening pattern (number of times of opening for each round and the time of each opening), the interval time between rounds, and the number of counts in one round (maximum) according to the current winning symbol. Set the number of winnings). Note that the opening pattern for each winning symbol is as described in the item “plurality of winning types” in the special symbol game process (FIG. 39). The interval time between rounds is set, for example, to about 2 seconds for “2 round symbols” and to several seconds (for example, 2 to 2.5 seconds) for “16 round symbols” or “4 round symbols”. And In addition, the number of counts in one round (maximum number of winnings) is 9 for all winning symbols, for example, but as mentioned above, winnings occur during an extremely short time (about 0.1 seconds). Is very rare (not impossible but extremely difficult).

  Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds in the current jackpot game based on the jackpot winning symbol selected in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 40). Specifically, if the large category “16 round symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 16 times. If “4-round symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to four. Further, if “2 round symbols” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to two. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in the buffer area of the RAM 76, for example, as a corresponding value on the program (“1” for 2 times, “3” for 4 times, “15” for 16 times).

  Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a big hit opening timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the variable winning device 30 is operated. If a value of about 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the big hit release timer, the release time is a sufficient time (for example, a launch control board) that the big winning opening is easily generated during one release. The set 174 is a time during which 10 or more game balls are fired, preferably 6 seconds or more. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit release timer is set to 0.1 seconds, the release time is short (becomes difficult) even if it is not possible to win a big prize opening during one opening. This is a time (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than a game ball firing interval by the firing control board set 174).

  Step S5210: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets a big hit interval timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The timer value set here is the waiting time between rounds of big hits.

  Step S5220: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the variable winning device management processing.

[Procedure for small hits]
Step S5212: On the other hand, in the case of a small hit (step S5202: No), the main control CPU 72 sets a “small hit opening pattern”. In the case of the present embodiment, for the “small hit opening pattern”, for example, an opening pattern of “0.1 second opening” is set for the first time and the second time. Since “small hit” has no concept of “round”, “open pattern” is also expressed as “first open” and “second open”.

  Step S5214: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times that the special winning opening is opened based on the large winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5212, for example, two times. The number of releases set here is stored in a buffer area of the RAM 76, for example.

  Step S5216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting release timer. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the variable winning device 30 is operated. In the present embodiment, as described above, 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the small hitting release timer, and during such an opening time, there is hardly any winning in the big winning opening during one opening. It becomes a short time (becomes difficult) (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the interval between game balls fired by the launching device unit).

  Step S5218: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting interval timer. The timer value set here is a waiting time for each time when the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed a plurality of times at the time of a small hit, and this timer value is set to about 2 seconds, for example.

  Step S5220: When the above procedure is completed at the time of the small hit, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the variable winning device management processing. Then, the main control CPU 72 executes a special winning opening / closing operation process.

[Big prize opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a special prize opening / closing operation process. This process is mainly for controlling the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the special winning opening. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the special winning opening solenoid 90 is output. Thereby, the variable prize-winning apparatus 30 operates and shifts from the closed state to the open state.

  Step S5304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an open timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous big winning opening release pattern setting process (step S5208 or step S5216 in FIG. 56) is executed.

  Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5308. Execute.

  Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball count process. In this process, the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 30 (open winning opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the count switch 84 within the opening time.

  Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (9). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round in the big hit, one in the small hit) as described above. If the count has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the large winning opening / closing operation process at the present stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the procedure of the above steps S5302 to S5310.

  If it is determined in step S5306 that the opening time has expired (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5310 that the count has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312. It should be noted that since the release timer value is set for a short time for both the first hit and the second round release of the “two-round probability variation symbol” at the small hit, the main control CPU 72 normally performs step S5310. In most cases, it is determined in step S5306 that the opening time has ended before confirming that the count number has reached the predetermined number.

  Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the special winning opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the special winning opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state.

  Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes interval standby processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the above-described special winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5210 or step S5218 in FIG. 56). When the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5316.

  Step S5316: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not it is in a big role (during big hit game). If the current game is a big game (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5318. On the other hand, if the current game is a small hit (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5322.

  Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter. Note that the value of the number-of-releases counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

  Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the number set within the current round. Here, the reason why the “number of times set in the current round” is determined is to deal with an opening pattern of “opening the variable winning device 30 multiple times within one round of big hit”, for example. . In the present embodiment, since such an open pattern is not particularly employed, the “number of times set in the current round” is set once for each round. Therefore, since the counter value reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S5322.

  If a pattern in which a plurality of opening / closing operations are repeated in one round as described above is employed, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the big winning opening / closing operation process at the present stage, and thus the procedure from step S5302 to step S5320 is repeatedly executed. As a result, the increment of the number-of-releases counter proceeds in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5322.

  Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening closing process, and returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 executes a special winning opening closing process.

[Large prize closing process]
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a special winning opening closing process. This special winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the variable winning device 30 or terminating the operation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5401: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game is a big game (big hit game), and if it is a big game (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5402.

  Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. Thereby, for example, the value of the round number counter is “1” at the stage where the first round ends and the second round is reached.

  Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the incremented round number counter value has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1-14) of the round number counter after increment, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1-14 after 1 subtraction) (No) Next, step S5405 is executed.

  Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the current round number counter value. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

  Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big prize opening / closing operation process.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes a variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes a big prize opening / closing operation process which is the next jump destination in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 55). Then, after execution of the special prize opening / closing operation process, through the execution of the special prize opening closing process, the main control CPU 72 executes the special prize opening closing process again, and repeatedly executes the above steps S5402 to S5408. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (2, 4, or 16).

  When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: YES), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5410.

  Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the round number counter (= 0), it sets the next jump destination to the end process.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

[Small hit]
On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, the procedure is as follows (special operation execution means).
Step S5411: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the current game is not playing a major role (step S5401: No), the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the number-of-releases counter.

  Step S5413: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the set number of times of release. The number of times of opening is set in the previous big opening opening pattern setting process (step S5214 in FIG. 56). If the value of the opening number counter has not yet reached the set opening number (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5416.

Step S5416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the special winning opening / closing operation process.
Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes a variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes a big prize opening / closing operation process which is the next jump destination in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 55). Then, after the execution of the special prize opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 executes the special prize opening closing process again through the execution of the special prize opening closing process, and goes through the above steps S5401 to S5413 (No) to step S5416. Step S5408 is repeatedly executed. Thereby, the opening / closing operation of the variable prize device 30 is repeatedly executed until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of times of opening (2 times).

  When the actual number of times of opening at the small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S5413: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5414.

  Step S5414, Step S5412: In this case, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the end process when the release counter is reset (= 0).

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

〔End processing〕
FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of termination processing. This end process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the variable prize apparatus 30. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S5502: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set, and if the value of the big hit flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5503. To do.

  Step S5503, Step S5504: In this case, the main control CPU 72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the big hit gaming state ends on the control processing of the main control CPU 72. In addition, the main control CPU 72 deletes “big hit” from the internal state flag and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control processing. The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation number status.

  Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 40) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-process.

  Step S5508: When the value of the probability variation function activation flag is set (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the probability variation number (for example, 70 times). The set value of the probability variation number is stored, for example, in the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76 and becomes the above-described number cut counter value. The probability variation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the variation of the special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. In this embodiment, since a substantial upper limit is set for the high probability state, the winning result may not be obtained in the high probability state and the state may return to the low probability state (so-called frequency cut probability changer; ST machine). . If the value of the probability variation function activation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5508, but since the probability variation ratio is 100% in the present embodiment, step S5508 is always performed. Executed.

  Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the time reduction function operation flag (01H) is set. This flag is also set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 40) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing.

  Step S5512: If the value of the time shortening function operation flag (variable time shortening function operation flag) is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time shortening (for example, 70 times). The value of the set time reduction count is stored in the time count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The number of times of time reduction set here is the upper limit number of times to shorten the variation time of the special symbol in subsequent games. If the value of the time shortening function activation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

  Step S5514: The main control CPU 72 generates a state designation command based on various flags (probability state setting means). Specifically, a state designation command representing “normal” is generated as the gaming state when the big hit flag is reset or the big game ends. If the high-probability state function activation flag is set, a state designation command indicating “high probability” is generated as the internal state, and if the time reduction function activation flag is set, the internal state is “reduced time”. A state designation command representing “medium” is generated. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  The procedure so far is a big hit, but in the case of a big hit (step S5502: No), the following procedure is executed.

  Steps S5520 and S5522: In the case of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H) and deletes “small hit” from the internal state flag. In the case of small hits, the internal condition device does not operate in particular, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of erasing the flag.

  Step S5515: The main control CPU 72 executes a mode setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting various modes such as the normal mode. The contents of the mode setting process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the special winning opening opening pattern setting process.

  Step S5518: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 39) in the special symbol game process as the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process.

[Mode setting processing]
FIG. 60 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the mode setting process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

Step S5600: The main control CPU 72 determines whether the current winning symbol is one of “16-round probability variation symbol”, “4-round probability variation symbol”, and “2-round probability variation symbol (limited to winning in a time-reduced state)”. Confirm whether or not. The “16 round probability variation symbol” includes “16 round probability variation symbol 1” and “16 round probability variation symbol 2”, and “4 round probability variation symbol” includes “4 round probability variation symbol 1” and “4 rounds”. Probability variation 2 "is included.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the winning symbol this time corresponds to “16-round probability variation symbol”, “4-round probability variation symbol”, “two-round probability variation symbol (limited to winning in a time-reduced state)” (step S5600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5604. On the other hand, it was confirmed that the winning symbol of this time does not correspond to any of “16 round probability variation symbol”, “4 round probability variation symbol”, and “2 round probability variation symbol (limited to winning in time shortened state)”. In the case (step S5600: No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5602.

Step S5602: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current winning symbol corresponds to “two-round probability variation symbol (limited to winning in a non-time shortened state)”.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the current winning symbol corresponds to “2-round probability variation (limited to winning in a non-time shortened state)” (step S5602: YES), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5606. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the current winning symbol does not correspond to the “two-round probability variation symbol (limited to winning in a non-time shortened state)” (step S5602: No), the main control CPU 72 completes the processing (FIG. Return to 59).

Step S5604: The main control CPU 72 sets a value corresponding to the night mode in the main control mode status. For this reason, in the case of winning with a symbol in which the time reduction function operates, the night mode is set as the main control mode.
Step S5606: The main control CPU 72 sets a value corresponding to the festival mode in the main control mode status.

  Step S5608: When the process of step S5604 is executed, the main control CPU 72 sets “8” as the variation pattern selection counter value. The set variation pattern selection counter value is decremented by 1 each time the special symbol is stopped and displayed once. For this reason, the special fluctuation in the night mode is executed only for eight fluctuations.

  Step S5610: On the other hand, when the process of step S5606 is executed, the main control CPU 72 sets “0” to the variation pattern selection counter value. When “0” is set in the variation pattern selection counter value, the special variation pattern is not selected. Through such processing, the main control CPU 72 can make the selected variation pattern a normal variation or a special variation (variation pattern regulating means).

When the main control mode status value is set, the main control CPU 72 generates a main control mode status command reflecting the value. The main control mode status command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 34).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the end process (FIG. 59).

[Usefulness with ball sorter]
The contents of the various control processes executed by the main control CPU 72 have been described above. In the present embodiment, by using the ball sorter 200 of the first structure example or the second structure example, the following usefulness in the game of the pachinko machine 1 Can demonstrate its sexuality. In the following, reference numerals of game balls are omitted as appropriate.

(1) By arranging the ball distribution device 200 in the game area 8a, even when the fluctuation time reduction function is in a normal state, the winning to the left starting winning opening 28a and the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting) It is possible to promote the occurrence of alternately winning in the winning opening 26).
(2) By the above (1), it is easy for the first special symbol working memory number and the second special symbol working memory number to reach the maximum values (for example, 4), respectively, even during the game in the normal state. Can be
(3) According to the above (2), the internal lottery can be executed by utilizing the total stored number (for example, 8) obtained by adding the maximum values of the first special symbol working memory number and the second special symbol working memory number. It is possible to increase the frequency of internal lottery.
(3) It is also possible to stabilize the timing from when each winning to the right start winning port 26 and the variable start winning device 28 (left start winning port 28a) occurs until various random numbers for lottery are acquired. it can.
(4) That is, in the above (3), even if there is a variation in the time required for the game ball distribution operation by the ball distribution device 200, the timing from when the “winning” occurs until the random number is acquired There is no impact. Thereby, the game nature using the total memory number (eight) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be realized without harming the fairness of the game.
(5) Even if the game ball 300 is stopped in the ball sorting apparatus 200, a prize is given to the right start winning port 26 and the variable start winning device 28 (left start winning port 28a) from other than the ball sorting apparatus 200. Will continue to be possible and will continue to guarantee winnings. For this reason, the progress of the game is not significantly hindered due to the trouble in the ball sorting apparatus 200, and it is possible to reduce the player's disadvantage due to the machine trouble.

  61 and 62 are conceptual diagrams showing a control method of the memory display unit 400. FIG. 61 shows a control method for moving the left four movable bodies 41a to 41d, and FIG. 62 shows a control method for moving the four right movable bodies 41e to 41h.

[First motor related]
As shown in FIG. 61, the number of steps of the first motor 310 is displayed in the uppermost column. The number of steps of the first motor 310 takes a value from “0” to “700”, and returns to “0” when the number of steps proceeds to “700”.

  In the second column from the top, the “light transmission state” and “light shielding state” of the first photosensor 350 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the first photosensor 350 has a number of steps from “0” to “23” of the first motor 310 and a number of steps from “677” to “700” of the first motor 310. Becomes “light-shielding state”. The first photosensor 350 is in the “light-transmitting state” while the number of steps of the first motor 310 is “23” to “677”.

  In the third column from the top, the operating state of the memory display unit 400 is displayed. The operation state includes items of four movable bodies 41a to 41d (first movable body to fourth movable body) on the left side. In the figure, the first movable body corresponds to the movable body 41a, the second movable body corresponds to the movable body 41b, the third movable body corresponds to the movable body 41c, and the fourth movable body is the movable body 41d. Corresponding to

[First movable body]
The first movable body performs the operation of “standing” or “falling” when the number of steps of the first motor 310 is “0” to “102”. Specifically, when the first motor 310 rotates clockwise (CW), the “falling” operation is performed, and when the first motor 310 rotates counterclockwise (CCW), the “standing” operation is performed.
Further, the first movable body maintains the operation of “standing up” when the number of steps of the first motor 310 is “102” to “560”.

Further, the first movable body performs the operation of “standing up” or “falling” when the number of steps of the first motor 310 is “560” to “661”. Specifically, when the first motor 310 rotates clockwise (CW), the operation of “standing” is performed, and when the first motor 310 rotates counterclockwise (CCW), the operation of “falling” is performed.
Furthermore, the first movable body maintains the “falling” operation when the number of steps of the first motor 310 is “661” to “700”.

[Second movable body]
The second movable body “falls” when the number of steps of the first motor 310 is “0” to “140” and when the number of steps of the first motor 310 is “661” to “700”. Maintain the operation.
Further, the second movable body performs the operation of “standing up” or “falling” when the number of steps of the first motor 310 is “140” to “241”. Specifically, when the first motor 310 rotates clockwise (CW), the “falling” operation is performed, and when the first motor 310 rotates counterclockwise (CCW), the “standing” operation is performed.

Further, the second movable body maintains the operation of “standing up” when the number of steps of the first motor 310 is “241” to “560”.
Furthermore, the second movable body performs the operation of “standing” or “falling” when the number of steps of the first motor 310 is “560” to “661”. Specifically, when the first motor 310 rotates clockwise (CW), the operation of “standing” is performed, and when the first motor 310 rotates counterclockwise (CCW), the operation of “falling” is performed.

[Third movable body]
The third movable body “falls” when the number of steps of the first motor 310 is “0” to “280” and when the number of steps of the first motor 310 is “661” to “700”. Maintain the operation.
Further, the third movable body performs the operation of “standing up” or “falling” when the number of steps of the first motor 310 is “280” to “381”. Specifically, when the first motor 310 rotates clockwise (CW), the “falling” operation is performed, and when the first motor 310 rotates counterclockwise (CCW), the “standing” operation is performed.

Further, the third movable body maintains the operation of “standing” when the number of steps of the first motor 310 is “381” to “560”.
Furthermore, the third movable body performs the operation of “standing” or “falling” when the number of steps of the first motor 310 is “560” to “661”. Specifically, when the first motor 310 rotates clockwise (CW), the operation of “standing” is performed, and when the first motor 310 rotates counterclockwise (CCW), the operation of “falling” is performed.

[Fourth movable body]
The fourth movable body “falls” when the number of steps of the first motor 310 is “0” to “420” and when the number of steps of the first motor 310 is “661” to “700”. Maintain the operation.
Further, the fourth movable body performs the operation of “standing up” or “falling” when the number of steps of the first motor 310 is “420” to “521”. Specifically, when the first motor 310 rotates clockwise (CW), the “falling” operation is performed, and when the first motor 310 rotates counterclockwise (CCW), the “standing” operation is performed.

Further, the fourth movable body maintains the operation of “standing” when the number of steps of the first motor 310 is “521” to “560”.
Furthermore, the fourth movable body performs the operation of “standing” or “falling” when the number of steps of the first motor 310 is “560” to “661”. Specifically, when the first motor 310 rotates clockwise (CW), the operation of “standing” is performed, and when the first motor 310 rotates counterclockwise (CCW), the operation of “falling” is performed.

In the figure, the rotation direction of the first motor 310 is displayed in the lowermost column.
When the first motor 310 rotates clockwise (CW), the number of steps of the first motor 310 decreases, and when the first motor 310 rotates counterclockwise (CCW), the number of steps of the first motor 310 increases. . When the number of steps of the first motor 310 further decreases from “0”, the number of steps returns to “700”. Here, the clockwise direction indicates a rotation direction when the motor side is viewed from the front end side of the output shaft of the motor.

[Second motor related]
As shown in FIG. 62, the number of steps of the second motor 320 is displayed in the uppermost column. Similar to the number of steps of the first motor 310, the number of steps of the second motor 320 takes a value from “0” to “700”, and returns to “0” when the number of steps advances to “700”.

  In the second column from the top, the “light transmission state” and “light shielding state” of the second photosensor 360 are displayed. In the illustrated example, when the number of steps of the second motor 320 is between “0” and “23” and when the number of steps of the second motor 320 is between “677” and “700”, the second photosensor 360. Becomes “light-shielding state”. The second photosensor 360 is in the “light-transmitting state” while the number of steps of the second motor 320 is from “23” to “677”.

  In the third column from the top, the operating state of the memory display unit 400 is displayed. The operation state includes items of four movable bodies 41e to 41h (fifth movable body to eighth movable body) on the right side. In the drawing, the fifth movable body corresponds to the movable body 41e, the sixth movable body corresponds to the movable body 41f, the seventh movable body corresponds to the movable body 41g, and the eighth movable body is the movable body 41h. Corresponding to

[Fifth movable body]
The fifth movable body performs the operation of “standing” or “falling” when the number of steps of the second motor 320 is “0” to “102”. Specifically, when the second motor 320 rotates clockwise (CW), the “falling” operation is performed, and when the second motor 320 rotates counterclockwise (CCW), the “standing” operation is performed.
Further, the fifth movable body maintains the operation of “standing up” when the number of steps of the second motor 320 is “102” to “560”.

Further, the fifth movable body performs “standing” or “falling” operation when the number of steps of the second motor 320 is “560” to “661”. Specifically, when the second motor 320 rotates clockwise (CW), the operation of “standing” is performed, and when the second motor 320 rotates counterclockwise (CCW), the operation of “falling” is performed.
Furthermore, the fifth movable body maintains the “falling” operation when the number of steps of the second motor 320 is between “661” and “700”.

[Sixth movable body]
The sixth movable body “falls” when the number of steps of the second motor 320 is “0” to “140” and when the number of steps of the second motor 320 is “661” to “700”. Maintain the operation.
Further, the sixth movable body performs the operation of “standing up” or “falling” when the number of steps of the second motor 320 is “140” to “241”. Specifically, when the second motor 320 rotates clockwise (CW), the “falling” operation is performed, and when the second motor 320 rotates counterclockwise (CCW), the “standing” operation is performed.

Further, the sixth movable body maintains the operation of “standing up” when the number of steps of the second motor 320 is “241” to “560”.
Furthermore, the sixth movable body performs the operation of “standing” or “falling” when the number of steps of the second motor 320 is “560” to “661”. Specifically, when the second motor 320 rotates clockwise (CW), the operation of “standing” is performed, and when the second motor 320 rotates counterclockwise (CCW), the operation of “falling” is performed.

[Seventh movable body]
The seventh movable body “falls” when the number of steps of the second motor 320 is “0” to “280” and when the number of steps of the second motor 320 is “661” to “700”. Maintain the operation.
Further, the seventh movable body performs the operation of “standing up” or “falling” when the number of steps of the second motor 320 is “280” to “381”. Specifically, when the second motor 320 rotates clockwise (CW), the “falling” operation is performed, and when the second motor 320 rotates counterclockwise (CCW), the “standing” operation is performed.

Further, the seventh movable body maintains the operation of “standing” when the number of steps of the second motor 320 is “381” to “560”.
Furthermore, the seventh movable body performs the operation of “standing up” or “falling” when the number of steps of the second motor 320 is “560” to “661”. Specifically, when the second motor 320 rotates clockwise (CW), the operation of “standing” is performed, and when the second motor 320 rotates counterclockwise (CCW), the operation of “falling” is performed.

[Eighth movable body]
The eighth movable body “falls” when the number of steps of the second motor 320 is “0” to “420” and when the number of steps of the second motor 320 is “661” to “700”. Maintain the operation.
Further, the eighth movable body performs the operation of “standing up” or “falling” when the number of steps of the second motor 320 is “420” to “521”. Specifically, when the second motor 320 rotates clockwise (CW), the “falling” operation is performed, and when the second motor 320 rotates counterclockwise (CCW), the “standing” operation is performed.

Further, the eighth movable body maintains the operation of “standing up” when the number of steps of the second motor 320 is “521” to “560”.
Furthermore, the eighth movable body performs the operation of “standing up” or “falling” when the number of steps of the second motor 320 is “560” to “661”. Specifically, when the second motor 320 rotates clockwise (CW), the operation of “standing” is performed, and when the second motor 320 rotates counterclockwise (CCW), the operation of “falling” is performed.

In the figure, the rotation direction of the second motor 320 is displayed in the lowermost column.
When the second motor 320 rotates clockwise (CW), the number of steps of the second motor 320 decreases, and when the second motor 320 rotates counterclockwise (CCW), the number of steps of the second motor 320 increases. . When the number of steps of the second motor 320 further decreases from “0”, the number of steps returns to “700”.

  The effect control device 124 can freely move the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h by controlling the driving of the motor according to the light transmission state, the light shielding state, the number of steps, and the like of the photosensor.

Specifically, the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h can be moved as follows. The following movable examples are preferable examples.
(1) From the state in which the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h have fallen, the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h can be erected in order from the left side.
(2) The eight movable bodies 41a to 41h can be raised at the same time from the state in which the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h have fallen.
(3) From the state in which the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h are collapsed, only the four movable bodies 41a to 41d on the left side or only the four movable bodies 41e to 41h on the right side can be erected at the same time.
(4) From the state in which the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h have fallen, the four movable bodies 41a to 41d on the left side are sequentially arranged one by one from the left side, and the four movable bodies 41e to 41h on the right side are sequentially arranged from the left side. Can be raised one by one.

(5) From the state where the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h are erected, the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h can be tilted in order from the right side.
(6) From the state where the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h are erected, the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h can be tilted simultaneously.
(7) From the state where the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h are erected, only the four movable bodies 41a to 41d on the left side or only the four movable bodies 41e to 41h on the right side can be tilted simultaneously.
(8) From the state where the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h are erected, the left four movable bodies 41a to 41d are arranged one by one from the right side, and the right four movable bodies 41e to 41h are arranged from the right side. You can fall down one by one in order.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the big hit internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the variation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, as described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lighted and blinked by 7-segment LEDs, so that they have poor appeal. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the variable display effect using the effect symbol is performed as described above.

  The effect designs include, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (see FIG. 1). ). Each effect design is a design of a picture card with a character attached together with the numbers “1” to “9”, for example. Among these, for the left effect symbol, a symbol row is arranged in ascending order of “1” to “9”, and for the middle effect symbol and the right effect symbol, the numbers are “9” to “1”. ”Are arranged in descending order. Such a symbol sequence is variably displayed so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction in the left region, middle region, and right region on the screen.

  FIG. 63 is a continuous diagram showing examples of effect images corresponding to the change display and stop display of special symbols. Here, an example of the change display effect and the stop display effect performed using the effect symbol is shown for the variation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (out). This variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects performed between the time when the special symbol (here, the second special symbol) starts the variable display and the time when the special symbol (here, the fixed stop) is displayed. The stop display effect is an effect that represents that the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the result of the internal lottery at that time is a combination of the effect symbols. Here, before explaining the specific contents of the control processing, the basic flow of the change display effect and stop display effect for each change employed in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before change display]
In FIG. 63 (A): For example, the left, middle and right effect symbols are displayed at the center position in the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 in a state before the special symbols start to change (not in the demonstration effect). ing. At this time, in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect symbol is also stopped.

  Although not specifically shown, the fourth symbol may be displayed, for example, at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 during the variation display of the effect symbol. The fourth symbol is a “fourth effect symbol” that follows the left, middle, and right effect symbols, and is displayed in a synchronized manner during the variation display of the effect symbol. The fourth design is a simple mark (for example, a “□” figure) with a color, and for example, a variable display can be expressed by changing the display color.

[Variable display production start]
In FIG. 63, (B): The three symbol sequences of the effect symbols scroll and change on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 in synchronization with the start of the change of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol). Then, the variable display effect is started (design effect execution means). That is, in synchronization with the start of the change of the special symbol, the display of the left effect, the middle effect, and the right effect is scrolled (flowed) in the vertical direction on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Be started. In the figure, the change display of the effect symbol is simply indicated by a downward arrow. In addition, during the variable display, each effect symbol is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display). At this time, an image (background image) that is the background of the effect symbol is displayed on the display screen in an easily visible state. ing.

  The background image in this case represents, for example, a landscape in which a female character wearing a yukata is sitting on a chaise lounge and relaxing as if the evening is cool. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, “normal mode”. In the present embodiment, the “normal mode” corresponds to a normal state in which the variation time shortening function is not activated and the probability variation function is also deactivated. In addition to this, various modes are provided for effects, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode (status display effect execution means). The difference between these modes may correspond to an internal “time reduction state” or a “high probability state”. Although not specifically illustrated here, a mode in which a notice effect is performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen after that is also possible.

[Left design stop]
(C) in FIG. 63: For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design first stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “8” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. Here, illustration of the background image is omitted (the same applies to the following).

[Right production symbol stop]
In FIG. 63 (D): After the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol stops changing thereafter. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “3” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. Since it has already been determined that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear on the appearance that the current fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns and the like are excluded. “Slip pattern” means, for example, that once the design symbol representing the number “7” stops, the design symbol slips by one symbol and the design symbol representing the number “8” stops, thereby developing reach It is to do. Alternatively, once the design symbol representing the number “9” stops, the design symbol that represents the number “8” stops as the design sequence slips by one symbol in the opposite direction. is there. In addition, for example, when an effect symbol representing a completely different number such as “5” is temporarily stopped and a character appears on the screen and the right effect symbol sequence is changed again, the number “8” is represented. There is also a pattern in which the production design stops and develops to reach.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 63 (E): The last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the special symbol stop display. When the result of the current internal lottery is non-winning and the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (missed) manner, the effect display is similarly performed in a non-winning (missing) manner. That is, in the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number “1” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of the effect symbols is “8”-“1”-“3”. Since this is a gap, it is expressed in the production that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of range”.

[Production example at the time of big hit]
FIG. 64 is a continuous diagram showing the flow of reach production executed at the time of a big hit (winning) in “16 round symbols” or “4 round symbols”. Here, in addition to the reach effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and a notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the notice effect (the notice effect before the occurrence of reach, the notice effect after the occurrence of reach) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

  The following reach effect is, for example, when the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 performs a variation display by the variation pattern at the time of the big hit, and then the first special symbol or the second special symbol is “16 rounds”. A mode indicating a “probable variation” or “four-round probability variation” (for example, “self”, “yo”, “mouth”, “口”, “F”, “E”, “L”, “Γ” of a 7-segment LED) Etc.) until it is stopped and displayed. In addition, in FIG. 64, each effect design is simplified and shown only as a number. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the flow of production.

[Variable display effects]
In FIG. 64 (A): The column of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 in the vertical direction substantially in synchronization with the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. For example, the variable display effect is started by scrolling from top to bottom.

[Preliminary production before reach (first stage)]
(B) in FIG. 64: Next, in a relatively early stage of the variable display effect, the first stage pre-reach notice effect using the character image (picture card) is performed. This pre-reach pre-announcement effect is a pre-announcement effect in which the change of the mode progresses in stages from one stage to a plurality of stages (for example, 2 to 5 stages) according to a predetermined order. The pattern image used in the pre-reach notice effect is located in front of the effect pattern that is displayed on the screen in a variable manner, for example, so as to appear suddenly from the left edge of the screen (other appearance modes) May be.) Note that the “pre-reach notice” means that a reach or a big hit is announced before any effect symbol is stopped and displayed. By executing such a “pre-reach announcement effect”, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “it may develop into a reach = the possibility of a big hit increases” is obtained.

[Advance notice before the reach occurs (second stage)]
In FIG. 64, (C): After the first stage of the pre-reach notice effect is executed, the change of the pre-reach notice effect proceeds to the second stage. Here, an effect using a character pattern image different from the previous one is performed as the notice effect before the occurrence of reach in the second stage. Specifically, another pattern image additionally appears from the right end of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed pattern image. The picture image displayed at this time is larger in size than the picture image displayed previously. And the effect by the sound output that the character expressed by the picture image emits a dialogue (for example, “I will reach” etc.) is also performed.

  Such a pre-reach notice announcement effect (second stage) using the second pattern image is one step further from the pre-reach notice effect (first stage) performed in FIG. 64 (B). It is a development type. In general, it may be expressed as “step-up notice” or the like, referring to the “pre-reach notice notice effect” that develops in this way. Here, an example is given in which the second-stage pattern image appears in the pre-reach notice effect, but the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. There may be. Further, for example, the size may be enlarged each time the third, fourth, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. Even at this stage, the variation display of the effect symbols is continued. In any case, it is possible to indicate to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) that this change will be a big hit by making the change in the aspect of the pre-reach notice effect to more stages. (For example, the maximum expectation is suggested when progressing to the fifth stage).

[Stop of left design]
In FIG. 64 (D): The middle stage of the variable display effect is approached, and then the variable display of the left effect symbol is stopped. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number “6” is stopped at the upper left position of the screen, and the effect symbol representing the number “7” is stopped at the lower left position.

[Generation of reach condition]
In FIG. 64 (E): Subsequently to the left effect symbol, for example, the change display of the right effect symbol is stopped. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number “6” is stopped at the lower right position, and the effect symbol representing the number “7” is stopped at the upper right position of the screen. On the diagonal line (on two diagonal lines), two types of reach states of the numbers “6” — “being changed” — “6” and “7” — “being changed” — “7” have occurred. On the screen, an image that emphasizes two diagonal lines that are in a reach state on a diagonal line is displayed together. In addition, an effect of outputting a voice such as “Reach!” Is performed. Furthermore, in this example, since there are two candidates of numbers “6” and “7” for the medium effect design (so-called double reach and double template), it is a highly anticipated reach state. In this embodiment, even if the number “6” is aligned or the number “7” is aligned, the probability variation is a big hit. Can be held by a person.

  After the reach state occurs, the reach production at the time of winning is executed (however, at this point in time, the winning result has not yet been expressed). In the reach production, only the production symbols corresponding to the tempered numbers (here, “6” and “7”) are displayed on the screen, and the others are not displayed. At this time, the effect symbols may be displayed in a reduced state at the four corners of the screen.

[Preliminary notice after reach occurs (first time)]
In FIG. 64, (F): After a reach state occurs, for example, an image representing a “heart” figure forms a group, and a notice effect after the occurrence of the reach (first time) is performed on the screen diagonally. . In this case, the image of the “heart group” is suddenly displayed on the screen so that the visual appeal to the player can be enhanced. By executing such a notice effect after the visually lively reach occurs, the player can have an even greater expectation.

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 64 (G): Following the notice effect after the first reach, for example, images representing the numbers “2” to “8” are displayed in a three-dimensional column on the screen. There is an effect in which numerical images are erased from the screen in the order of “2”, “3”, “4”. Such an effect is also intended to suggest (imply) or remind the player that the number “6” or “7” is a “hit” if it remains unerased to the end. Done in If the number “5” is erased and “6” remains in front of the screen, it is “big hit”, and even if the number “6” is erased and “7” remains in front of the screen, it is “big hit”. However, if the number “7” is also erased, it means “out of place”. In this case, for example, the number “8” is displayed on the screen after the number “7” is deleted. Therefore, during this time, the numbers “2”, “3”, “4”... Are erased in order, and as the number “5” approaches, the player's tension and expectation. The feeling will also increase. After this, for example, if up to the number “4” is erased on the screen, the next time the number “5” is finally erased, the possibility of a “hit” will increase. A feeling increases at a stretch.

[Preliminary notice after the occurrence of reach (second time)]
In FIG. 64 (H): When the reach production is approaching the final stage, the image of the character is suddenly displayed on the screen as if it was split into a large image, and the character emits some dialogue (or silently) (The content may be that of smiling). At this time, for example, the content of the reach effect is a development that “if the number“ 5 ”is erased, then the possibility of a big hit of“ 6 ”-“ 6 ”-“ 6 ”increases” ”. Therefore, by causing a character image to appear greatly at this timing, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “may be a big hit” is obtained.

  As a reach production different from the above, for example, if “numbers“ 2 ”to“ 6 ”are erased and the number“ 7 ”is left unerased at the end,“ 7 ”-“ 7 ”- There is also a development that “7 will be a big hit”. When the character image appears at such a timing, an effect can be obtained in which the player can have a sense of expectation that “there may be a big hit due to the effect design of 7”.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 64 (I): The last medium effect symbol stops substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In this example, the winning symbol internally corresponds to “16-round probability variation symbol 1”, so by stopping the production symbol representing an odd number “7” on the production in the center of the screen, this time There is an effect instructing the player that “a big hit with 7 performance symbols”.

  In FIG. 64 (J): A stop display effect is also performed for the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. By performing such a stop display effect, the player can be informed that the final winning type has been confirmed on the effect.

  In addition, if the result of the internal lottery is non-winning, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as the off symbol, so that the staging display effect is also performed in a manner of deviation in the same manner. Execution means). In this case, by displaying numbers “5” and “8” other than “6” and “7” in the center of the screen, unfortunately, an effect is provided informing that the current change did not result in a big hit. Such an effect is executed as an “out of reach reach effect”.

[Director during big role (at first hit)]
FIG. 65 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big-bill effect that is executed during a big hit game in the case of the “16-round probability variable big hit” at the first hit (first big hit). The production control CPU 126 executes the big role production at the time of first hit as a scenario type big role production (special special game production execution means).

[At the start of one round]
In FIG. 65 (A): When the first round of jackpot game is started, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen, and character information such as “BIG BONUS” is displayed. The In the case of “4-land probability variation big hit”, character information such as “REGURAR BONUS” is displayed. In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, the number “7”) is displayed at the upper left corner of the screen. In this way, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) during the big hit game, the player can be continuously informed of the information that “the big hit with the seven effect symbols”.

[10 rounds]
In FIG. 65, (B): In the tenth round of the jackpot game, the explanation effect of the internal state that is shifted to after the jackpot game ends is executed. In the example shown in the figure, for example, a “female character wearing a yukata” is displayed large on the display screen, and an effect of generating the line “Fireworks mode is special time!” Is being executed. By executing such an explanation effect, it is possible to convey to the player that the game will shift to the high probability time shortened state after the big hit game is over. Thereafter, in the 10th to 15th rounds during the big hit game, the explanation effect of the internal state that is shifted to after the big hit game is finished is executed.

[16 rounds]
In FIG. 65, (C): After that, the big hit game proceeds smoothly and shifts to the final 16 rounds. At this time, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND16” is displayed on the screen, and a unique effect image is displayed during the big hit game. In the upper left corner of the screen, the effect symbol (number “7”) as the “remaining eye” is continuously displayed.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 65, (D): At the timing when the big hit game is finished (during termination processing), the big end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, character information “Fireworks mode has entered!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “fireworks mode” in the “high probability state” and “time reduction state” as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Director during a major role (non-first time)]
FIG. 66 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big-game effect executed during a big hit game in the case of “16 rounds probable big hit” at non-first hit. In addition, although the example of illustration shows the example of the effect at the time of 2 big hits continuously, it is a big role production other than the 5 big hits continuously (3 series, 4 series, 6 series) For the eyes and the like), the same big-game production as in the illustrated production example is executed. Then, the effect control CPU 126 executes the non-first hit big role effect as a non-scenario type big role effect (special game effect execution means).

[At the start of one round]
66 (A): When the first round of jackpot game is started, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen, and character information such as “BIG BONUS” is displayed. The This is the same as the big role production at the time of first hit.

[10 rounds]
In FIG. 66 (B): In the 10th round of the jackpot game, an introduction effect of characters appearing during the game is executed. In addition to the character introduction effect, a commentary effect on the reach effect may be executed. In the example shown in the figure, for example, a “panda character” is largely displayed in the display screen. After that, in the 10th to 15th rounds during the big hit game, the introduction effects of the characters appearing during the game are also executed.

[16 rounds]
In FIG. 66 (C): After this, the big hit game proceeds smoothly and shifts to the final 16 rounds. At this time, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND16” is displayed on the screen, and a unique effect image is displayed during the big hit game. In addition, the above-mentioned effect symbol (number “3”) as the “remaining eye” is continuously displayed at the upper left corner position of the screen. These points are also the same as the big role production at the time of first hit.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 66, (D): At the timing when the big hit game is ended (during the end process), the big end effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, character information “Fireworks mode has entered!” Is displayed on the screen.

[Director during a major role (at the time of a specified Renso)]
FIG. 67 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big-game effect that is executed during a big hit game in the case of a “16 round probable big hit” at a specific consecutive resort. In addition, in the example of illustration, the example of the effect at the time of making a big hit 5 times continuously is shown. The production control CPU 126 executes the big-game effect at the time of the specific consecutive resort as a scenario-like big-game production (special special game production execution means).

[At the start of one round]
67 (A): When the first round of jackpot game is started, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen, and character information such as “BIG BONUS” is displayed. The This is the same as the big role production at the time of first hit.

[10 rounds]
In FIG. 67 (B): In the 10th round of the jackpot game, a premium presentation of characters appearing during the game is executed. In the example shown in the figure, for example, an effect is produced in which a “Sennin character” and a “female character” meet on the display screen. Thereafter, the premium effects are executed in the same manner from round 10 to round 15 during the big hit game.

[16 rounds]
In FIG. 67 (C): After this, the big hit game proceeds smoothly and shifts to the final 16 rounds. At this time, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND16” is displayed on the screen, and a unique effect image is displayed during the big hit game. In the upper left corner of the screen, the effect symbol (number “5”) as the “remaining eye” is continuously displayed. These points are also the same as the big role production at the time of first hit.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 67 (D): At the timing when the big hit game ends (during the end process), the big end effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, character information “Fireworks mode has entered!” Is displayed on the screen.

[Example of fireworks mode]
FIG. 68 is a continuous diagram showing an example of effects in the fireworks mode. This fireworks mode can be selected as either “4 round probability variation big hit 1”, “4 round probability variation big hit 2”, “16 round probability variation big hit 1”, “16 round probability variation big hit 2” or “2 round probability variation big hit 2” ) ”, A mode that is shifted to after a major game, and corresponds to a“ high probability state ”and a“ time reduction state ”. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  In FIG. 68 (A): For example, by performing the first variation display after the end of the big hit game, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the “fireworks mode” state. The background image of the fireworks mode is a background image that expresses "a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky" and "a female character watching fireworks" in order to deeply impress the player with the motif of fireworks It has become.

  In FIG. 68 (B): Since the first change (when not winning) after the big hit game ends, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("3"-"1"-"7 ").

  In FIG. 68 (C): When the next fluctuation is started, the second fluctuation display is performed after the end of the big hit game. This “fireworks mode” is continued until the special symbol fluctuates 70 times. Since the fireworks mode is a time shortening state, the variable start winning device 28 is frequently operated, and unless the game ball is stopped, the second and subsequent fluctuation display after the end of the big hit game. In many cases, the variation display of the effect symbol accompanying the variation display of the second special symbol is performed.

[Example of production when winning with 2-round probability variable design]
FIGS. 69 and 70 are continuous diagrams showing an example of effects and an example of mode transition effects that are executed at the time of winning in the “2-round probability variable symbol”.

  This effect example represents an example of a variable display effect and a stop display effect using an effect symbol. Among these, the variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects performed from when the special symbol starts variable display to when it is stopped and displayed (including fixed stop). The stop display effect is an effect that indicates that the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the result of the internal lottery at that time is a combination of the effect symbols. Furthermore, the mode transition effect is an effect for making it difficult to understand the internal state. In addition, in the following description, the description of matters common to the above-described effect examples such as when winning the 16 round big hit is omitted as appropriate.

[Before starting variable display production]
In FIG. 69, (A): Three lines of effect symbols are displayed large in the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The effect design is stopped and displayed with a combination of numbers “4”-“6”-“7”.

[Variable display production start]
In FIG. 69 (B): The variable display effect is started by the scroll variation of the three symbol rows on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

[Left design stop]
In FIG. 69 (C): the left effect symbol representing the number “1” stops at the middle position of the screen.

[Right production symbol stop]
In FIG. 69 (D): The right effect design representing the number “5” stops at the middle position of the screen.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 69 (E): The last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. Normally, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed as an outlier symbol, the stop symbol effect is also displayed in the same manner as the effect symbol, but here the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the “two-round probability variation symbol” mode. Therefore, the stop display effect is performed in a mode in which the special effect symbol is used as the medium effect symbol.

  In the illustrated example, the special effect design having the characters “Festival” at the middle position of the screen is stopped. By stopping the special effect design as the medium effect design as in this example, it is possible to teach (suggest) to the player that there is a possibility of having hit some sort. As a result, it is possible to remind the player that there is a possibility that the player has shifted to the “hidden probability change (latency probability change)” state in subsequent games, and to suppress a decrease in game motivation. In addition, when it corresponds to "2 round probability variation design", you may stop and display an effect design in a specific arrangement order (chance, order, etc.) instead of stopping such a special effect design.

[Example of mode transition effect]
When the two-round probability variation symbol is a big hit, a mode transition effect is executed. This mode transition effect is executed, for example, at the timing when the above-mentioned “2-round probability variation symbol” jackpot occurs.

(Door closing effect)
FIG. 70 (F): For example, assuming that the background image so far is an image corresponding to “normal mode”, doors (襖) appear from both sides of the display screen during two rounds of big hit (during special game execution). Then, a stunning closing effect is performed at the center. Such a door closing effect is performed for the purpose of attracting the player's eyes by temporarily covering the display screen so far.

(Door opening production)
(G) in FIG. 70: Next, the closed door quickly moves to the left and right of the display screen, and an effect (door opening effect) representing the operation of opening the door is performed. Such a door opening effect is performed, for example, in the sense that the player is interested in the result of the opening of the door.

[Mode transition (background change) production]
In FIG. 70 (H): When the door is opened, the background image changes to a mode representing “festival mode” together with, for example, character information “Festival mode entry!”. The background image of “Festival Mode” is a background image with motifs of images such as “Taiko”, “Lantern”, and “Uchiwa” to deeply impress the festival. By executing such a mode transition effect, it is possible to visually appeal to the player that the mode has shifted to a different mode on the effect, thereby recalling the possibility of a “high probability state” The motivation to continue the game can be maintained until the next winning is obtained (toward the next winning). In the present embodiment, even when hitting a small hit, such a “festival mode” is entered. For this reason, there is no difference between the case corresponding to “small hit” and the case corresponding to “2 round probability change”, and the player is made to guess the internal state, thereby improving the willingness to continue the game.

[Festival mode production]
In FIG. 70 (I): Following the mode transition effect, the effect symbol variation display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the next special symbol variation display. The background image at this time has already been switched to the “festival mode” mode. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the door is performed, and the player is informed that the transition from the “normal mode” to the “festival mode” is made. In addition, although the pattern which transfers from "normal mode" to "festival mode" is mentioned as an example here, when changing to another mode (stage), the same flow effect may be executed.

  In the above example, an example is shown in which “2 round probability variation symbol” is won when the internal state is a non-time shortened state. When the internal state is the time shortening state, if “2 round probability variation symbol” is won, the mode transition effect is directly entered into the “fireworks mode”.

[Memory number display effect]
71 and 72 are continuous diagrams illustrating an example of the effect of the memory number display effect using the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h and the memory display lamp 340. FIG.

  In FIG. 71 (A): For example, in synchronization with the start of variation of the special symbol, the variation display effect is started by the scroll variation of the three symbol rows on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Here, since no lottery elements of special symbols are stored, none of the movable bodies 41a to 41h and the memory display lamp 340 are lit.

  71 (B): On the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the variable display effect is continued by scrolling the three symbol rows.

[Example of production when working memory increases]
In addition, since the lottery element is stored during this period, the number of working memories is increased by 1 (for example, winning to the right start winning opening 26 occurs), so that the leftmost lamp among the memory display lamps 340 is displayed. An effect that lights up is performed. Such an effect is, for example, that the number of working memories corresponding to the first special symbol is increased by one by turning on a lamp at a position where the memory display lamp 340 has not been lit until then. For the purpose of teaching.

  Further, in the illustrated example, the leftmost movable body 41a is lit. The memory display lamp 340 is turned on in accordance with a predetermined order (for example, in order from the left lamp), and the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h are also turned on in a predetermined order. It is lit and displayed according to the order (for example, in order from the left movable body). Each memory indicator lamp 340 is lit in blue when the memory corresponding to the first special symbol is increased, and is lit in red when the memory corresponding to the second special symbol is increased. In the example, the display colors are not particularly distinguished. Each movable body is lit and displayed in a basic display color (for example, white).

  In addition, regarding the storage display of the lottery elements, the reason why the two pseudo memories such as the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h and the memory display lamp 340 are mounted is that the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h are in addition to the memory display. Since it may be used for various effects, the memory display lamp 340 is mounted in addition to the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h, thereby realizing a clearer memory display.

  In FIG. 71, (C): The effect design that is currently displayed in a variation state has progressed, for example, to the stage where the left effect design has stopped (“2” — “being changed” — “being changed”). In parallel with this, it is assumed that the number of memories corresponding to the special symbol is further increased by 1 (occurrence of winning at the left start winning opening 28a).

  In this case, the effect that the second lamp from the left of the memory display lamps 340 is lit is performed. In addition, an effect of lighting the second movable body 41b from the left is also performed.

  In FIG. 72 (D): With respect to the effect symbol that is currently displayed in a variable manner, for example, it has progressed to the stage where the right effect symbol has stopped (“2” — “in change” — “9”). In parallel with this, it is assumed that the number of memories corresponding to the special symbol is increased by one (occurrence of winning at the right start winning opening 26).

  In this case, an effect is produced in which the third lamp from the left of the memory display lamp 340 is turned on. In addition, an effect of lighting the third movable body 41c from the left is also performed.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 72 (E): With respect to the effect symbols that have been displayed in a variable manner until then, the stop display effect is executed (“2”-“3”- “9”). At this time, in the first special symbol display device 34, stop display is performed according to the non-winning mode (center bar “-”). In parallel with this, it is assumed that the number of memories corresponding to the special symbol is further increased by 1 (occurrence of winning at the left start winning opening 28a).

  In this case, the effect that the fourth lamp from the left of the memory display lamps 340 is turned on is performed. In addition, an effect of lighting the fourth movable body 41d from the left is also performed.

[Start of next change]
In FIG. 72 (F): After this, for example, when the stop display time of the first special symbol elapses, the next special start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Along with this, on the screen, the variable display effect using the effect symbol is started. At this time, the lottery element corresponding to the oldest memory is consumed and the internal lottery is executed. In the illustrated example, the fourth movable body 41d from the left and the fourth memory display lamp 340 from the left are turned off.

  Regarding the turn-off of the movable body and the memory display lamp, conceptually, the leftmost lamp is turned off, and then the remaining three lighting displays slide to the left, but in reality they are performed simultaneously. As a result, the fourth lighting display from the left is turned off.

  FIG. 73 and FIG. 74 are continuous diagrams showing examples of simultaneous movable effects produced on the condition that the total stored number has reached a specified number (for example, eight). Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the flow of production.

  73 (A): For example, in synchronization with the start of the change of the special symbol, the variable display effect is started by the scroll change of the three symbol rows on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Here, it is assumed that the total number of memories has increased to 7 (before the specified number). In this case, the left seven movable bodies 41a to 41g are lit. The memory display lamp 340 is also lit up to the seventh from the left.

[Direction when total memory reaches 8]
(B) in FIG. 73: When the total stored number reaches a specified number (for example, 8), all the movable bodies 41a to 41h including the rightmost movable body 41h are turned on. Also, all the memory display lamps 340 are turned on.

[Simultaneous movable production]
In FIG. 73 (C): When all the movable bodies 41a to 41h are in the lighting state, a simultaneous movable effect that moves from the state in which all the movable bodies 41a to 41h fall down is executed. This gives the player a sense of satisfaction and a sense of accomplishment that “the memory has been saved to the maximum”, and a new surprise by the operation of the movable bodies 41a to 41h.

  In FIG. 74 (D): After that, for example, a special symbol is stopped and displayed, so that a stop display effect by the effect symbol is performed in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Further, all the movable bodies 41a to 41h continue to stand upright.

[Start of next change]
In FIG. 74 (E): Thereafter, when the special symbol stop display time elapses, the next special symbol variation display is started when the next start condition is satisfied. Along with this, on the screen, the variable display effect using the effect symbol is started. At this time, the lottery element corresponding to the oldest memory is consumed and the internal lottery is executed. In the illustrated example, the rightmost movable body 41h and the rightmost memory display lamp 340 are turned off.

At this time, the rightmost movable body 41h is returned from the standing state to the collapsed state. By performing such individual movements of the movable body, it is possible to tell the player impressively that “the maximum stored memory has been consumed”.
After that, an effect of shifting each movable body from the standing state in order from the right side to the falling state in accordance with the digestion of the memory is executed. For this reason, when all the memories are consumed, all the movable bodies 41a to 41h are in a collapsed state. In addition, when the total storage number reaches a specified number (for example, 8) again before all the memory is consumed, all the movable bodies 41a to 41h are turned on and stand up.

[Special movable effects]
75 to 80 are continuous diagrams showing examples of special reach effects including special movable effects by the movable body.
Here, the “special reach effect” represents an effect of executing the “special movable effect” by the movable bodies 41a to 41h during the reach effect. In addition, the “special movable effect” is an effect in which all the movable bodies 41a to 41h are erected at the same time and then all the movable bodies 41a to 41h are simultaneously collapsed, and the movable bodies 41a to 41h are repeatedly operated. This is an effect of changing the light emission form (display color) of the movable body lamp 330 in accordance with the progress of the effect. This special movable effect is not limited to the reach effect, but may be executed in any scene during the game. In the present embodiment, the special movable effect is executed as a chance-up effect that increases the degree of big hit expectation.

[Variable display effects]
In FIG. 75 (A): In synchronization with the start of the variation of the special symbol, the left effect symbol, middle effect symbol, and right effect symbol rows are scrolled in the vertical direction on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 so as to change the display. Production begins. In the illustrated example, two lottery elements are stored, and the lottery element corresponding to the oldest memory is consumed and the internal lottery is executed. For this reason, the second movable body 41b from the left and the second memory display lamp 340 from the left are turned off. The remaining first movable body 41a from the left is lit in the basic display color (white display color), and the first memory display lamp 340 is also lit in the red display color (corresponding to the second special symbol). doing.

[Stage progress notice effect (first stage)]
FIG. 75 (B): Next, during the execution of the variable display effect, the first stage advance notice effect (pre-reach notice effect) using the female character's picture image (reference number SU1) is performed. This stage advance notice effect is a notice effect in which a change in mode progresses step by step from one step to a plurality of steps (for example, 2 to 5 steps) according to a predetermined order. The pattern image used in this stage advance notice effect is displayed in such a manner that it suddenly appears at the corner position of the liquid crystal screen. Note that the “stage advance notice effect” here is a notice effect with content that suggests that there is a possibility that the effect symbol may be stopped and displayed in a winning manner according to the progress of the effect.

[Stage progress notice effect (2nd stage)]
In FIG. 75 (C): the stage advance notice effect of the second stage is executed following the stage advance notice effect of the first stage. In the illustrated example, another female character SU2 additionally appears from the lower right position of the screen and is displayed on the screen together with the female character SU1 that has been displayed previously.

[Stage progress notice effect (3rd stage)]
In FIG. 76 (D): The stage advance notice effect at the third stage is executed following the stage advance notice effect at the second stage. In the illustrated example, the third female character SU3 additionally appears from the upper left position of the screen and is displayed on the screen together with the female characters SU1 and SU2 that have been displayed previously.

[Stage progress notice effect (4th stage)]
In FIG. 76 (E): The stage advance notice effect of the fourth stage is executed following the stage advance notice effect of the third stage. In the illustrated example, a fourth female character SU4 additionally appears from the upper right position of the screen, and is displayed on the screen together with the female characters SU1 to SU3 displayed previously.

[Production when working memory increases (2nd)]
At this time, the number of memories corresponding to the special symbol is increased by one (occurrence of winning at the right start winning opening 26), and the effect at the time of increasing the operating memory is executed. That is, among the memory display lamps 340, an effect that the second lamp from the left side is lit in blue display color is performed, and an effect that the second movable body 41b from the left side is lit in the basic display color is performed.

[Stage progress notice effect (5th stage)]
In FIG. 76 (F): The stage advance notice effect of the fifth stage is executed following the stage advance notice effect of the fourth stage. In the example shown in the figure, the fifth female character SU5 appears as a close-up at the center position of the screen, and is displayed on the screen together with the female characters SU1 to SU4 displayed previously. At this time, the left effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped and displayed at the middle position of the screen.

[Moving body standing effect (basic display color)]
At this time, a special movable effect in which all the movable bodies 41a to 41h stand up simultaneously is executed. Here, with respect to the lighting states of the movable bodies 41a to 41h, since the number of operation memories is two (one corresponding to each of the first and second special symbols), the movable bodies 41a and 41b are displayed in the basic display colors. An effect of standing up in a state where the light is turned on (white display color) and the other movable bodies 41c to 41h are turned off is performed. This special movable effect is an effect that increases the degree of expectation of the big hit, and can improve the player's expectation.

[Generation of reach condition]
In FIG. 77 (G): Following the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol is then stopped and displayed. At this time, the right effect design representing the number “5” is stopped and displayed at the middle position of the screen. When the right effect design is stopped and displayed, a reach state of the numbers “5”-“being changed”-“5” is generated in a horizontal line (on one line) on the screen. On the screen, an image that emphasizes one line that is in a reach state is also displayed.

[Production when working memory increases (3rd)]
At this time, the number of memories corresponding to the special symbol is increased by one (occurrence of winning at the left start winning opening 28a), and the effect at the time of increasing the operating memory is executed. That is, among the memory display lamps 340, an effect is produced in which the third lamp from the left is lit in red display color, and an effect is produced in which the third movable body 41c from the left is lit in the basic display color.

[Moving body fall production (basic display color)]
At this time, a special movable effect is performed in which all the movable bodies 41a to 41h are simultaneously collapsed. Here, regarding the lighting states of the movable bodies 41a to 41h, the number of working memories is three (one corresponding to the first special symbol, two corresponding to the second special symbol), and therefore movable. The bodies 41a to 41c are lit in the basic display color (white display color), and the other movable bodies 41d to 41h are rendered to fall down in the unlit state.

[Preliminary notice after reach occurs]
In FIG. 77 (H): After a reach state has occurred, for example, an image representing a cat character forms a group and passes through the screen from the right to the left. Done. By executing such a notice effect after the occurrence of reach, an effect of giving the player a greater expectation can be obtained.

[Moving body standing effect (yellow display color)]
At this time, a special movable effect in which all the movable bodies 41a to 41h stand up simultaneously is executed. Here, with respect to the lighting states of the movable bodies 41a to 41h, an effect of standing up with the lighting display color changed is executed. Specifically, the movable bodies 41a to 41c change from the basic display color (white display color) to the yellow display color, and the other movable bodies 41d to 41h are stood up in an unlit state.

[Story reach production]
In FIG. 77 (I): The reach state continues even after the post-reach notice effect is executed, and after that, it develops into a story reach effect. In the illustrated example, a story reach development effect in which a special female character appears in a car is executed. In the upper left corner position of the screen, the variable display effect is executed in a state where the effect symbol is reduced (“5” − “being changed” − “5”).

[Production when working memory increases (fourth)]
At this time, the number of memories corresponding to the special symbol is increased by one (occurrence of winning at the right start winning opening 26), and the effect at the time of increasing the operating memory is executed. That is, the effect that the fourth lamp from the left side of the memory display lamp 340 is lit in blue display color is performed, and the effect that the fourth movable body 41d is lit from the left is performed. Here, in addition to the movable body 41d, the lighting display colors of the movable bodies 41a to 41c which are lit are yellow display colors, and the movable body 41d to be newly lit is the basic display color (white display color). If it is lit, the player will feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the newly lit movable body 41d is lit in the same yellow display color as the display colors of the other lit movable bodies 41a to 41c.

  In FIG. 78 (J): For example, an effect that the car stops is executed, a female character appears from the car, and an effect that produces the line “I am your opponent !!” is executed. In this way, it is possible to suggest that the expectation of jackpot for the player is high by causing a special woman to appear.

[Moving body fall production (yellow display color)]
At this time, a special movable effect is performed in which all the movable bodies 41a to 41h are simultaneously collapsed. Here, regarding the lighting states of the movable bodies 41a to 41h, the number of working memories is four (two corresponding to the first special symbol, two corresponding to the second special symbol), and therefore movable. An effect is produced in which the bodies 41a to 41d are lit in yellow display color and the other movable bodies 41e to 41h are turned off in a state of being turned off.

  FIG. 78 (K): For example, an image of “lantern ghost” appears on the left side of the screen, an image of “female character” appears on the right side of the screen, and an image of the character “VS” appears on the center of the screen. Production is performed. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that the story reach production will start.

[Moving body standing effect (green display color)]
At this time, a special movable effect in which all the movable bodies 41a to 41h stand up simultaneously is executed. Here, with respect to the lighting states of the movable bodies 41a to 41h, an effect of standing up with the lighting display color changed is executed. Specifically, the movable bodies 41a to 41d change from a yellow display color to a green display color, and the other movable bodies 41e to 41h are rendered standing up in an unlit state.

[Direction when working memory increases (fifth)]
At this time, the number of memories corresponding to the special symbol is increased by one (occurrence of winning at the left start winning opening 28a), and the effect at the time of increasing the operating memory is executed. That is, among the memory display lamps 340, the effect that the fifth lamp from the left is lit in red display color is performed, and the effect that the fifth movable body 41e from the left is lit is performed. Here, the lighting display color of the movable bodies 41a to 41d that are lit in addition to the movable body 41e is a green display color, and the movable body 41d to be newly lit is a basic display color (white display color) or If it is lit in the yellow display color before the change, the player will feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the movable body 41e that is newly lit is lit in the same green display color as the display colors of the other lit movable bodies 41a to 41d.

  In FIG. 78 (L): After this, the story reach production proceeds in detail. For example, “Lantern Haunted” has a large opening, and the “Kamitsuki” technique is performed. Then, there will be a performance in which the female character runs away with surprise and disappears to the right side of the screen.

[Moving body fall production (green display color)]
At this time, a special movable effect is performed in which all the movable bodies 41a to 41h are simultaneously collapsed. Here, regarding the lighting states of the movable bodies 41a to 41h, the number of working memories is five (two corresponding to the first special symbol, three corresponding to the second special symbol), and therefore movable. An effect is produced in which the bodies 41a to 41e are lit in a green display color, and the other movable bodies 41f to 41h are turned off while being turned off.

  In FIG. 79 (M): This time, a “female character” takes out a fan (weapon), and the fan fights “Lantern Haunted”.

[Moving body standing effect (green display color)]
At this time, a special movable effect in which all the movable bodies 41a to 41h stand up simultaneously is executed. Here, regarding the lighting states of the movable bodies 41a to 41h, since the number of working memories is five (three corresponding to the first and second special symbols, respectively), the movable bodies 41a to 41e are displayed in green. The other movable bodies 41f to 41h are turned on, and an effect of standing up with the lights off is performed.

  In FIG. 79 (N): “Lantern Haunted” delivers a special technique that makes its long tongue pop out of its mouth, and a “female character” plays the special technique with a fan. In this state, if the “lantern ghost” wins, it will be out of place, and if the “female character” wins, it will be a win. Therefore, this phase is the final stage of story reach production, and is the most exciting part as a game.

[Moving body fall production (green display color)]
At this time, a special movable effect is performed in which all the movable bodies 41a to 41h are simultaneously collapsed. Here, regarding the lighting states of the movable bodies 41a to 41h, since the number of working memories is five (three corresponding to the first and second special symbols, respectively), the movable bodies 41a to 41e are displayed in green. The other movable bodies 41f to 41h are turned on, and an effect of standing up with the lights off is performed.

[Production when working memory increases (6th)]
At this time, the number of memories corresponding to the special symbol is increased by one (occurrence of winning at the right start winning opening 26), and the effect at the time of increasing the operating memory is executed. That is, among the memory display lamps 340, the effect that the sixth lamp from the left is lit in blue display color is performed, and the effect that the sixth movable body 41f is lit from the left is performed. Here, in addition to the movable body 41f, the lighting display colors of the movable bodies 41a to 41e that are lit are green display colors, and the movable body 41f that is to be newly lit is a basic display color (white display color) or If it is lit in the yellow display color before the change, the player will feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the newly lit movable body 41e is lit in the same green display color as the display colors of the other lit movable bodies 41a to 41e.

  79 (O): In the final stage of the story reach production, the cut-in notice production is executed. In the example shown in the figure, three female characters are displayed in a diagonally cut area on the screen, and a scene in which all female characters are praying with their hands together is displayed.

[Moving body standing effect (red display color)]
At this time, a special movable effect in which all the movable bodies 41a to 41h stand up simultaneously is executed. Here, with respect to the lighting states of the movable bodies 41a to 41h, an effect of standing up with the lighting display color changed is executed. Specifically, the movable bodies 41a to 41f change from the green display color to the red display color, and the other movable bodies 41g and 41h are stood up in an unlit state.

  In FIG. 80, (P): “Woman character” is displayed large together with the characters “Victory!” And “Lantern ghost” is displayed small, meaning that it is a win (winning). At the upper left corner position of the screen, the stop display effect is executed with the effect symbol reduced ("5"-"5"-"5"). However, all of the three production symbols are displayed swinging from side to side, and the variation of the production symbols is not completely stopped. At this time, the special symbol is in a changing state.

[Moving body fall production (green display color)]
At this time, a special movable effect is performed in which all the movable bodies 41a to 41h are simultaneously collapsed. Here, with respect to the lighting states of the movable bodies 41a to 41h, the number of operating memories is six (three corresponding to the first special symbol, three corresponding to the second special symbol), and therefore movable. An effect is produced in which the bodies 41a to 41f are lit in a red display color and the other movable bodies 41g and 41h are turned off in a state of being turned off.

  In the case of non-winning (outside), “Land Lantern Haunted” is displayed along with the letters “Defeat ・ ・”, “Woman Character” is displayed small, and the production pattern is reduced in the upper left corner of the screen. The stop display effect is executed in the state (for example, “5”-“6”-“5”). Further, regarding the lighting state of the movable bodies 41a to 41h at the time of non-winning (at the time of disengagement), the movable bodies 41a to 41f are turned on by changing the red display color to the basic display color (white display color), and other movable bodies For 41g and 41h, an effect of falling off is performed in a state where the light is extinguished, and when the operating memory is increased thereafter, an effect that a new movable body is lit in the basic display color (white display color) is performed.

  In FIG. 80 (Q): Then, an effect is produced in which the “female character” pushes up one arm upward and emits the line “Iccho Arigato!”. Thereby, it is possible to make the player feel the reverberation that “I won the lantern ghost”, and to improve the player's satisfaction. At this point in time, all the effect symbols arranged in a three-way manner are displayed to oscillate to the left and right, and the variation of the effect symbols has not completely stopped. At this time, the special symbol is in a changing state.

[Moving body standing and falling repeatedly (rainbow color)]
At this time, a special movable effect in which all the movable bodies 41a to 41h stand up simultaneously is executed. Here, with respect to the lighting states of the movable bodies 41a to 41h, an effect of standing up with the lighting display color changed is executed. Specifically, the movable bodies 41a to 41f change from a red display color to a rainbow display color, and the other movable bodies 41g and 41h are stood up in an unlit state. The player's satisfaction can be further improved by changing the display color and executing the special movable effect when the big hit is confirmed. In this special movable performance, the player's satisfaction can be further improved by repeating the standing and falling.

[Production when working memory increases (7th)]
At this time, the number of memories corresponding to the special symbol is increased by one (occurrence of winning at the left start winning opening 28a), and the effect at the time of increasing the operating memory is executed. That is, among the memory display lamps 340, the effect that the seventh lamp from the left side is lit in red display color is performed, and the effect that the seventh movable body 41g from the left is lit is performed. Here, in addition to the movable body 41g, the lighting display colors of the movable bodies 41a to 41f that are lit are iridescent display colors, and the movable body 41g that is to be newly lit is the basic display color (white display color). If it is lit in the yellow display color, the green display color, or the red display color before the change, the player feels uncomfortable. Therefore, the newly lit movable body 41g is lit in the same rainbow color as the display colors of the other lit movable bodies 41a to 41f.

  In FIG. 80 (R): The stop display effect is also performed for the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed in a state where the effect symbol is completely stopped without shaking. By performing such a stop display effect, the player can be informed that the final winning type has been confirmed on the effect.

  In the example shown in the figure, an effect of re-entering a car on which a female character has been boarded is executed, and character information “Congratulation” is displayed to congratulate the jackpot. After that, the big hit gaming state is entered, and the big-game effect is executed on the screen.

[Directing the movable body standing up and down repeatedly]
[Production when working memory increases (8th)]
In addition, while the effect of repeating the standing and falling of the movable bodies 41a to 41h is performed, the number of memories corresponding to the special symbol is increased by 1 (occurrence of winning at the right start winning opening 26) when the working memory increases Production is performed. That is, among the memory display lamps 340, the effect that the eighth lamp from the left is lit in blue display color is performed, and the effect that the eighth movable body 41h is lit from the left is performed. Here, in addition to the movable body 41h, the lighting display colors of the movable bodies 41a to 41g that are lit are rainbow display colors, and the movable body 41h that is to be newly lit is the basic display color (white display color). If it is lit in the yellow display color, the green display color, or the red display color before the change, the player feels uncomfortable. Therefore, the newly lit movable body 41h is lit in the same rainbow display color as the display colors of the other lit movable bodies 41a to 41g.

  As described above, in the special movable performance, all the movable bodies 41a to 41h repeatedly perform the operation of “standing up” → “falling down” → “standing up” → “falling down”, which further surprises the player. Give it a new game. Further, when the operation memory is stored, the special movable effect can be executed while the movable body lamps 330 in the movable bodies 41a to 41h are turned on, and the basic display color (white display color) is displayed in another display. By changing to the color, it is taught that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. In addition, when a new operation memory is stored (a winning at the start winning opening occurs) and the operation memory increase effect is executed, the lighting display color of the movable body by the special movable effect is the basic display color (white display color). If the display color is different from the default display color (white display color) instead of the basic display color (white display color), the player will feel uncomfortable. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Special production during a major role (player participation type production)]
81 to 87 are continuous diagrams showing examples of successful effects of special effects executed during the big hit game. Hereinafter, a production example will be specifically described.

[At the start of one round]
81 (A): When the first round of jackpot game is started, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen, and character information such as “BIG BONUS” is displayed. The In addition, an effect symbol (number “7”) as a “remaining eye” is displayed at the upper right corner position of the screen.

As for the movable bodies 41a to 41h and the memory display lamps located below the movable bodies 41a to 41h, the movable body 41a is lit in the basic display color (white display color), the memory display lamps under the movable body 41a are lit, and the like. The movable bodies 41b to 41h and the memory display lamps below the respective movable bodies 41b to 41h are turned off. That is, it represents that the current number of working memories is one.

[At the start of 2nd round]
In FIG. 81 (B): When the second round of the jackpot game is started, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND2” is displayed on the screen. In addition, a female character appears, and an effect that produces a dialogue such as “If you have five people, you have a chance!” Is executed. At the same time, production by sound output is also performed. In this way, the player can be informed that a chance can be obtained if five people appear and are displayed on the screen.

  In FIG. 81 (C): After a certain amount of time has passed, an effect is produced in which the same female character as before, emits a dialogue such as “Give 5 actors!”. As described above, when five movable bodies are lit, that is, when five working memories are stored, the player can be informed that the previous five people will appear.

[At the start of the third round]
In FIG. 82 (D): When the third round of the jackpot game is started, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND3” is displayed on the screen. Also, the first female character SU1 appears in the lower left corner of the screen, and an effect is displayed in which character information such as “four more” is displayed in the center of the screen. Then, the effect of standing up while the movable body 41a is lit is performed.

[Round 4]
In FIG. 82 (E): When the fourth round of jackpot game is started, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND4” is displayed on the screen. In addition, in the fourth round, an effect at the time of increase in working memory in which the number of memories corresponding to the special symbol is newly increased by two is executed, and an effect in which the movable bodies 41b and 41c are lit and stand up is performed. Then, the second and third female characters SU2 and SU3 appear in the upper left corner and lower right corner of the screen, and an effect is displayed in which character information such as “two more” is displayed in the center of the screen.

[5th round]
82 (F): When the fifth round of the jackpot game is started, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds “ROUND5” is displayed on the screen. In addition, in the fifth round, an effect at the time of increase in working memory in which the number of memories corresponding to the special symbol is newly increased is executed, and an effect in which the movable body 41d is lit and stands is performed. Then, the fourth female character SU4 appears in the upper right corner of the screen, and an effect is displayed in which character information such as “one more person” is displayed in the center of the screen.

  83 (G): When a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the fifth round, a working memory increase effect in which the number of memories corresponding to the special symbol is newly increased by one is executed, and the movable body 41e is A lighting and standing effect is performed. Then, a fifth female character SU5 appears as a close-up at the center position of the screen, and is displayed on the screen together with the female characters SU1 to SU4 previously displayed. In addition, the text information “achievement !!” is displayed on the screen. Such an effect can give a sense of satisfaction to the player that “five female characters could all be gathered”.

[At the start of round 6]
[When special production start conditions are met]
83 (H): When the sixth round of the jackpot game is started, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND6” is displayed on the screen. In addition, an effect that character information such as “bashibashi chance start” appears on the screen is performed. In addition, an effect that the movable bodies 41a to 41e are brought down is also performed. Thereby, the player can be informed that the “bashibashi chance” has started.

  In FIG. 83 (I): When a certain amount of time has passed, a female character appears, and an effect (successful hitting explanation effect) that produces a dialogue such as “Raise the meter by pressing the button repeatedly! Then, a five-stage meter appears at each upper part of the movable bodies 41a to 41h, and an effect is produced in which an image imitating the effect switching button 45 appears behind the dialogue of the female character. As a result, when the effect switching button 45 is repeatedly hit, the meter accumulates, when one meter is accumulated up to the fifth stage, one movable body stands up, and the movable bodies 41a to 41h that have fallen earlier are in this “bashibashi chance” The player can be instructed to enter the night mode when all are standing.

  In FIG. 84 (J): The female character disappears, an image simulating the effect switching button 45 is displayed on the front, and the character information “continuous hit!” Is displayed above the effect switching button 45. Thereby, the player can be prompted to repeatedly hit the effect switching button 45. When the player depresses the effect switching button 45, an effect switching button 45 representing the pressed state is displayed, and effects such as “Bashi!” And “Bashi!” Are displayed around the image imitating the effect switching button 45. There is an effect in which the onomatopoeia when the switch button 45 is pressed is displayed as character information. In addition, a state in which the meter located at the upper part of the movable body 41a is accumulated up to three out of five stages as the player presses the effect switching button 45 a plurality of times is shown.

  In FIG. 84 (K): The player presses the effect switching button 45 a plurality of times, and the meter located at the upper part of the movable body 41a is accumulated up to 5 out of 5 stages, and “MAX” is displayed on the front of the meter. Character information is displayed. At the same time, an effect is produced in which the movable body 41a is lit in the basic display color (white display color) and stands up.

  FIG. 84 (L): A state in which the player has pressed the effect switching button 45 a plurality of times and the meter located at the upper part of the movable body 41b is accumulated up to 3 stages out of 5 stages. Note that the movable body 41a is lit in the basic display color (white display color) and is kept standing.

  In FIG. 85 (M): The player switches the effect switching button 45 a plurality of times, and the meter located at the top of the movable body 41b accumulates up to 5 out of 5 stages, and “MAX” is displayed on the front of the meter. Character information is displayed. At the same time, an effect is produced in which the movable body 41b is lit in the basic display color (white display color) and stands up.

  In FIG. 85, (N): The player switches the effect switching button 45 a plurality of times, and the meter located at the upper part of the movable body 41b is accumulated up to 5 out of 5 stages, and “MAX” is displayed on the front of the meter. Character information is displayed. Here, since the display of “MAX” is newly displayed and the meter is accumulated, the effect of raising the movable body 41c is started, but before the movable body 41c is turned on and stands, the adjacent movable body 41d. The state where the meter corresponding to is accumulated up to 3 levels out of 5 levels is shown. Therefore, this indicates that the player has pressed the effect switching button 45 a plurality of times before the movable body 41c stands. That is, it is expressed that the press of the effect switching button 45 is effective even while the effect that the movable body stands up or lights up is being executed. As a result, an effect in which the meter increases regardless of the effect of the movable body is displayed, so that the next movable body is quickly raised without giving the player the standby time during the effect that the movable body stands up. An operation (pressing down) for the production can be prompted.

  In FIG. 85, (O): When the meter corresponding to the movable body 41c has accumulated in 5 stages, lighting and standing by the basic display color of the movable body 41c are performed. Also, until the movable body 41c stands up, a meter corresponding to the movable body 41d has already accumulated due to the player pressing the effect switching button 45 a plurality of times, and a meter corresponding to the next movable body 41e is also stored. It shows that 4 stages are accumulated in 5 stages.

[Eighth round]
86 (P): After a certain period of time, the eighth round of the jackpot game is started, and character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND8” is displayed on the screen. As for the meter corresponding to the movable body, the state is shown that the meters for 7 movable bodies are accumulated up to 5 stages in 5 stages and the remaining 1 meter is accumulated in 4 stages in 5 stages. Further, the movable bodies 41a to 41e have already stood up, the fifth movable body 41e from the left is lit in yellow display color, and the sixth movable body 41f from the left is lit in green display color and stands up. Production is performed. Since the meter corresponding to the seventh movable body 41g from the left is accumulated up to five stages out of five stages, it is expected that the effect of the movable body 41g will be started as soon as the effect of standing up the movable body 41f is completed. Is done.

  In FIG. 86, (Q): When the meter corresponding to the movable body 41g is accumulated in five stages, the movable body 41g is turned on and raised in red. Finally, when the meter corresponding to the movable body 41h has accumulated in 5 stages out of 5 stages, the movable body 41h is turned on and raised by the rainbow color display color, and the text “Great success !!” is displayed in the center of the screen. An effect that causes information to appear is executed.

[9 rounds start]
[All movable body standing success production]
86 (R): The ninth round of the jackpot game is started, and character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND9” is displayed on the screen. The screen displays character information such as “Get Night Mode!”, All the movable bodies 41a to 41h stand up, and the meter corresponding to the movable body 41h has accumulated up to 5 stages out of 5 stages. It is represented. As a result, it is determined that all the movable bodies 41a to 41h are erected by pushing the effect switching button 45 a plurality of times by the player (all meters are saved), and as a result, the mode shifts to the night mode. Can be taught.

[10 rounds start]
87 (S): The tenth round of the jackpot game is started, and character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND10” is displayed on the screen. Then, a female character appears on the screen, and an effect is displayed in which a dialogue such as “I did it!” Is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the game that the woman requested in the sixth round of the jackpot game was successful. In addition, the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h maintain the standing state.

[16 rounds]
In FIG. 87 (T): After this, the big hit game proceeds smoothly and shifts to the final 16 rounds. At this time, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND16” is displayed on the screen, and a unique effect image is displayed during the big hit game. Here too, the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h are maintained in the standing state.

[Night mode entry production]
In FIG. 87 (U): At the timing when the big hit game ends (during end processing), the big end effect of the content teaching the mode to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, character information “night mode entry!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “night mode” as a privilege that the game in the big hit game is successful.

[Example of night mode production]
FIG. 88 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the night mode effect. The effect control CPU 126 executes the night mode effect when the condition for executing the special mode effect is satisfied (special mode effect executing means). The night mode corresponds to a “high probability state” and a “time reduction state”. The night mode is a mode that continues until the special reach effect is executed. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  88 (A): For example, by performing the first variation display after the end of the big hit game, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the “night mode” state. The night mode background image represents, for example, a landscape in which a skyscraper group and a night neon street are displayed together with a night downtown background.

  In FIG. 88 (B): Since the first fluctuation after the end of the big hit game (during non-winning) has ended, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("3"-"1"-"5 ").

[Next fluctuation start]
88 (C): When the next fluctuation is started, the second fluctuation display is performed after the big hit game ends. The night mode is continued until the special reach effect is executed. If the special reach effect is lost, the night mode is shifted to the fireworks mode. Further, since the night mode is a time shortening state, the variable start winning device 28 is frequently operated. For this reason, unless the launch of the game ball is stopped, the variation display of the effect symbol accompanying the variation display of the second special symbol is frequently performed.

[Examples of special reach production]
FIG. 89 is a continuous diagram showing an example of special reach production performed in the night mode.

[Variable display effects]
In FIG. 89 (A): For example, the change display of the effect symbol is performed in the “night mode” state by performing the change display for several rotations after the end of the big hit game. On the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the variable display effect is started in such a manner that the columns of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol scroll in the vertical direction.

[Stop of left design]
In FIG. 89 (B): The middle stage of the variable display effect is approached, and the variable display of the left effect symbol is eventually stopped. In the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number “3” is stopped at the left position of the screen.

[Generation of reach condition]
89 (C): Subsequently to the left effect symbol, the change display of the middle effect symbol is stopped. At this point, the production symbol representing the number “3” is stopped, and therefore, the reach state of the numbers “3”-“3”-“being changed” is generated on the screen.

89 (D): After the reach state has occurred, the scroll speed of the right effect symbol decreases, and the effect of gradually bringing the effect symbol “3” closer to the tempering line is executed.
89 (E): The reach state is continuing, and in the example shown, the effect that the effect symbol “3” passes the tempering line is being executed.
89 (F): An effect in which the scroll speed of the right effect symbol gradually increases is being executed.
89 (G): Furthermore, the scroll speed of the right effect symbol gradually increases, and the effect of increasing the scroll speed to the extent that the number of the effect symbol is not visible is executed.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 89 (H): Finally, the right effect design stops. In this example, an effect design that indicates to the player that “a big hit with the design symbol of 3” has been performed this time by stopping the effect design representing the number “3” on the right side of the screen. Yes.

  If the result of the internal lottery is non-winning, the special symbol is stopped and displayed with the off symbol, so that the effect symbol is similarly displayed with a stop display effect in the manner of deviation (symbol effect executing means). In this case, by displaying numbers “2” and “4” other than “3” on the right side of the screen, unfortunately, an effect is provided informing that the current change did not result in a big hit. Then, after such “special outlier reach effect” is executed, the mode is shifted to the fireworks mode.

[When special production start conditions are not met]
FIG. 90 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect when the special effect is not executed during the big hit game. Even when the night mode entry conditions are satisfied, for example, if a predetermined number or more is not stored, the special effect is not executed during the big hit game. If the night mode entry conditions are not satisfied, the special effect is not executed in the first place. Hereinafter, examples of effects will be described.

[6 rounds start]
FIG. 90 (G): When the sixth round of the jackpot game is started, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds “ROUND6” is displayed on the screen. Here, if you can't memorize more than 5 working memories by the 5th round of the jackpot game, when the 6th round starts, a female character will appear and say "Sorry ..." The production is performed. In addition, an effect is also performed in which the movable bodies 41a to 41d that have stood up to the previous time are brought down. As a result, the player can be informed that the “bashibashi chance” could not be started.

[16 rounds start]
In FIG. 90 (H): Thereafter, the jackpot game proceeds smoothly and shifts to the final 16 rounds. At this time, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND16” is displayed on the screen, and a unique effect image is displayed during the big hit game.

[Fireworks mode entry production]
90 (I): At the timing when the big hit game ends (during end processing), the big end ending effect of the contents teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, character information “Fireworks mode has entered!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “fireworks mode” in the “high probability state” and “time reduction state” as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[All moving body standing failure production]
FIGS. 91 and 92 are continuous diagrams showing examples of failure effects of special effects executed during a big hit game. Even if the night mode entry condition is satisfied, for example, if the consecutive hit game with “bashibashi chance” fails, a special effect failure effect is executed. Hereinafter, examples of effects will be described.

[9 rounds start]
91 (R): The ninth round of the jackpot game is started, and character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND9” is displayed on the screen. Here, when all the movable bodies 41a to 41h cannot be erected during "Bashibashi Chance", when the ninth round is started, the text information such as "Night mode get ..." is displayed on the screen. Is displayed. In addition, as shown in the result, the meter corresponding to the last movable body 41h is accumulated up to 4 stages out of 5 stages, and the movable body 41h is produced in a state of falling down. As a result, it is not possible to stand up all the movable bodies 41a to 41h because the player has not sufficiently pressed down the effect switching button 45 a plurality of times (all meters cannot be accumulated). ) As a result, it can be taught that it has been decided not to shift to the night mode.

[10 rounds start]
91 (S): The 10th round of the jackpot game is started, and character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND10” is displayed on the screen. Then, a female character appears on the screen and an effect is displayed in which a dialogue such as “Sorry ...” is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the game that the woman requested in the sixth round of the jackpot game has failed.

[16 rounds]
In FIG. 92 (T): After this, the big hit game proceeds smoothly and shifts to the final 16 rounds. At this time, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND16” is displayed on the screen, and a unique effect image is displayed during the big hit game.

[Fireworks mode entry production]
In FIG. 92 (U): At the timing when the big hit game ends (during the end process), the big end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, character information “Fireworks mode has entered!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “fireworks mode” in the “high probability state” and “time reduction state” as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Direction of the fluctuation special mode]
93 and 94 are continuous diagrams showing an example of the effect of the variation special mode effect.
Here, the change special mode effect is an effect that shifts to the fireworks mode once after the big hit game, and shifts to the night mode after several changes. Even if the rush conditions of the night mode are satisfied, the special mode is not executed and the night mode mode is not executed, or the player does not participate in the special mode, or the failure result is output even if he participates in the special mode When it is done, the effect control CPU 126 executes this effect (the variation special mode effect executing means). Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  FIG. 93 (A): For example, the change display of the effect symbol is performed in the “fireworks mode” state by performing the change display of the number change (within 7 changes) after the end of the big hit game.

  In FIG. 93 (B): All effect symbols are stopped and displayed due to the end of the special symbol change (when not winning) (“7”-“8”-“3”).

  (C) in FIG. 93: The next special symbol variation has started. This variation is a variation in which a special reach effect is executed. At the initial stage when the variation of the special symbol is started, the variation of the effect symbol is displayed in the “fireworks mode” state.

  In FIG. 93 (D): A while after the change of the special symbol is started, a cracked image is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen. As a specific form of production, a bullet is fired from the front of the liquid crystal screen, the bullet penetrates the liquid crystal screen, and the production is performed as if the liquid crystal screen was perforated. .

  In FIG. 94 (E): An effect is produced in which cracks (cracks) entering radially centering on the through-hole gradually spread over the entire liquid crystal screen.

  In FIG. 94 (F): The effect that the cracks that have entered in a radial manner are crushed and the glass fragments are shattered and piled up in the lower area of the liquid crystal screen is executed, and at the same time, the night corresponding to the “night mode” An effect in which a background image in which a group of buildings is represented appears is executed.

[Stop of left design]
In FIG. 94 (G): The middle stage of the variable display effect is approached, and the variable display of the left effect symbol is eventually stopped. In the illustrated example, the effect design representing the number “7” is stopped at the left position of the screen.

[Generation of reach condition]
In FIG. 94 (H): Next to the left effect symbol, the change display of the medium effect symbol is stopped. At this point, since the effect design representing the number “7” is stopped, the reach state of the numbers “7”-“7”-“being changed” is generated on the screen. Thereafter, the special reach effect (see FIG. 89) described above is executed.

  In this way, even if the night mode is not entered after the jackpot game is over, if the night mode variation pattern is selected, the player suddenly enters the night mode due to the variation. Can give surprises and can exhibit new gameplay.

  Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effects will be described. The above-mentioned variable display effects, reach effects, advance notice effects before reach, memory number display effects, pre-read notice effects, etc., additional effects linked to this, mode transition effects, simultaneous movable effects, special movable effects, etc. Both are controlled through the following control process.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed, for example, in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a period of several tens of μs to several ms) during execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

  The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), simultaneous movable effect management process (step S400a), operation memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), display output process (step S404), This is a configuration including a subroutine group of a lamp driving process (step S406), an acoustic driving process (step S408), an effect random number update process (step S410), and other processes (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along each process.

  Step S400: In the command receiving process, the effect control CPU 126 receives an effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. The effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 according to type. The command for the effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special figure destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number increases, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number decreases, a start port Winning tone control command, demonstration effect command, lottery result command, variation pattern command, variation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, state designation command, number of rounds command, error notification command, jackpot end effect command, variation pattern There are destination judgment commands and the like.

  Step S400a: In the simultaneous movable effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the execution of the effect that is executed when the stored number reaches the maximum value (simultaneously movable effect executing means). The contents of the simultaneous movable effect management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S401: In the action memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the execution of the memory number display effect using the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h and the memory display lamp 340. The contents of the working memory effect management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbols, and controls the effect contents during the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects effect patterns of various notice effects (notice effect before reach occurrence, effect after reach, etc.). The contents of the effect symbol management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) with basic control information of the effect contents (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). , An operation memory effect pattern number, a prefetch notice effect pattern number, a change effect pattern number, a change notice effect number, a background pattern number, etc.). Thereby, the effect display control device 144 (the display control CPU 146 and the VDP 152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect content (effect executing means).

  Step S406: In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp driving circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp driving circuit 132 drives (turns on or off, blinks, changes in luminance gradation, etc.) the various lamps 46 to 52 and the panel lamp 53 based on the control signal.

  Step S408: In the next sound drive process, the effect control CPU 126 sends the effect contents (for example, BGM, sound data, etc. during the variable display effect, during the reach effect, during the mode transition effect, during the jackpot effect) to the sound drive circuit 134. Instruct. Thereby, the sound according to the production content is output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The effect random numbers include, for example, a random number used for selecting a notice, a random number used for a normal background change lottery (effect lottery), a random number used for a movable body standing effect lottery, and the like.

  Step S412: In other processing, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body (movable bodies 41a to 41h). The movable body is operated by a driving source such as the first motor 310 and the second motor 320, and performs an effect in synchronism with the display of an image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently. The driving sources such as the first motor 310 and the second motor 320 can be connected to the panel illumination board 138 in FIG. 30, for example.

  Through the above-described effect control process, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect contents in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the simultaneous movable effect management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Simultaneous movable production management processing]
FIG. 96 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the simultaneous movable effect management process.
Step S800: First, the effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the current total stored number has reached a specified number. This confirmation is made by, for example, the value (first special symbol working memory number) indicated by the first special symbol working memory number increase effect command received from the main control CPU 72 and the second special symbol working memory number increase effect command. This can be done based on the indicated value (second special symbol working memory number). As a result, when the total stored number has reached a specified value (e.g., 8) (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S802.

  Step S802: In this case, the effect control CPU 126 sets an effect pattern for the simultaneous movable effect. Specifically, an effect pattern in which all the movable bodies 41a to 41h are erected simultaneously is selected, and after the next change, an effect pattern in which the movable bodies are brought down one by one in order from the rightmost movable body 41h. select.

[When the total number of memories has not reached the specified number]
On the other hand, if the total stored number has not yet reached the specified number (for example, 8) (step S800: No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 95).

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the working memory effect management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S700: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, and confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories increases is stored. When it is confirmed that the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S702. If it is not possible to confirm that the effect command at the time of increasing the number of operating memories is stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S702.

  Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect selection process when the number of working memories increases (stored number display effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 newly generates an effect pattern (one of the memory display lamp 340 and the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h corresponding to the display mode of storage of the first special symbol or the second special symbol). The lighting pattern of the movable body lamp 330 and the lighting pattern of the memory display lamp 340 are selected. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored. When it is confirmed that the production command when the number of working memories decreases is saved (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S706. If it is not possible to confirm that the effect command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect selection process when the number of working memories decreases (stored number display effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern (light-off pattern of the memory display lamp 340) that turns off the memory display lamp 340 corresponding to the display mode of the storage of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Moreover, either the effect pattern which turns off the lighting display about the rightmost movable body among the movable bodies 41a to 41h which are lit up or the effect pattern which is kept in the lit display (the turn-off pattern of the movable body lamp 330). Or a lighting maintenance pattern) is selected. In addition, after executing the simultaneous movable effect, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern in which the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h are sequentially defeated from the right side whenever the working memory decreases. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 95).

[Direction selection process when working memory increases]
FIG. 98 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S <b> 708: The effect control CPU 126 executes the action command increase time effect command analysis process received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and analyzes the stored effect command when the number of operating memories is increased, so that the increased operating memory relates to the first special symbol, While confirming whether it is related to the second special symbol, the number of working memories after the increase is confirmed. Therefore, when the value of the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories received from the main control CPU 72 is “BCH” in the upper byte representing the type of the command and “02H” in the lower byte, It is confirmed that the command relates to the second special symbol and the number of working memories after the increase is the second. Then, based on the analysis result, the effect control CPU 126 sets the memory display lamp 340 that will perform the action memory increase effect or the movable body lamp 330 in the movable bodies 41a to 41h as the target lamp. For example, when the working memory to be increased is the second special symbol, and there are still two working memories of the first special symbol, the target lamp for performing the working memory increasing effect from now on is the fourth lamp, that is, Setting is performed for the fourth memory display lamp 340 from the left and the movable body lamp 330 in the movable body 41d. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S710.

  Step S710: The effect control CPU 126 turns on the target memory display lamp 340. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 turns on the target memory display lamp 340 set in the previous step S708. For example, when the target lamp is the fourth memory display lamp 340 from the left, the lamp is turned on. In addition, when the working memory increased this time is related to the first special symbol, the corresponding memory display lamp 340 is lit in blue display color, and when the working memory increased this time is related to the second special symbol, it corresponds. The memory display lamp 340 may be lit in red display color. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S712.

  Step S712: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the movable body display color flag value is greater than zero. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130, refers to the stored movable body display color flag value, and confirms whether the referenced value is greater than zero.

  Here, in the movable body display color flag value, an effect pattern that is selectively determined in an effect pattern selection process in the effect symbol variation pre-processing described later corresponds to a special reach effect pattern, and an effect ( For example, it is a flag value set when the example of production in FIGS. 75 to 80 is being executed. Specifically, it is a flag value corresponding to lighting effects of various display colors by the movable bodies 41a to 41h during the special reach effect, and when the display color changes, the flag value is also changed. As for the correspondence between the movable body display color flag value and the display color, when the movable body display color flag value is 01H, it corresponds to the yellow display color, and when it is 02H, it corresponds to the green display color and is 03H. The case corresponds to a red display color, and the case corresponding to 04H corresponds to a rainbow display color (display color by an effect of repeating seven colors from blue to red).

  As a result of the confirmation, if the movable body display color flag value is greater than 0 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S714. On the other hand, when the movable body display color flag value is not greater than 0 (0) (No), the presentation control CPU 126 next executes step S716.

  Step S714: The effect control CPU 126 turns on the target movable body with a display color corresponding to the movable body display color flag value. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 lights the movable body lamp 330 in the target movable body (any of 41a to 41h) set in the previous step S708 with a display color corresponding to the movable body display color flag value. Let For example, when the target lamp is the movable body lamp 330 in the movable body 41d and the movable body display color flag value is 03H, the target lamp is lit in red display color. The effect control CPU 126 returns to the operation memory effect management process (FIG. 97).

  Step S716: The effect control CPU 126 turns on the target movable body in a normal display color (basic display color). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 lights the movable body lamp 330 in the target movable body (any one of 41a to 41h) set in the previous step S708 in a basic display color (for example, white display color). . For example, when the target lamp is the movable body lamp 330 in the movable body 41d, the target lamp is lit in white display color.

  In addition, before performing this step S716, you may determine whether to perform a prefetch memory | storage display notice effect based on a special figure destination determination effect command. For example, if the result of internal lottery corresponds to a big hit as a result of internal lottery or a special fluctuation pattern at the time of loss, a pre-read storage display notice effect is executed, otherwise, step S716 is executed. May be. Further, when the pre-read storage display notice effect is executed, the display color of the movable body may be set to light up with a green display color or a red display color instead of the basic color (white display). Thereby, not only the said fluctuation | variation but the fluctuation | variation performed from now on can be taught a jackpot expectation degree.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the working memory effect management process (FIG. 97).

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the movable body corresponding to the operation memory is turned on with a display color (for example, red display color) different from the normal display color (basic display color (for example, white display color)). When a special effect is being performed, a new working memory is acquired, and when the increase effect is executed, the corresponding movable body is lit in the basic display color (white display color), There was an inconvenience in relation to the display color (red display color) of the movable body. However, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the display color of the movable body corresponding to the special effect is confirmed at the time of the increase in the working memory, and the same display color as that confirmed is supported. Since the movable body is turned on, it is possible to eliminate the uncomfortable feeling caused by the difference in lighting of the lamp due to an increase in working memory (winning) during a special performance.

[Direction selection process when the number of working memories decreases]
FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect selection process when the number of working memories decreases. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S <b> 718: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect command analysis process when the working memory decreases received from the main control 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and analyzes the saved effect command when the number of working memories is reduced, so that the reduced action memory relates to the first special symbol, While confirming whether it is related to the second special symbol, it is confirmed how many working memories after the decrease. Therefore, if the value of the production command for reducing the number of working memories received from the main control CPU 72 is “BBH” as the preceding value of the upper byte representing the type of the command and “13H” as the lower byte, this production It is confirmed that the command relates to the first special symbol, and the number of working memories after the decrease (current time) has become three from the four working memories up to the previous time. Then, based on the analysis result, the effect control CPU 126 sets the memory display lamp 340 that will perform the action memory reduction effect or the movable body lamp 330 in the movable bodies 41a to 41h as the target lamp. For example, if the working memory that decreases from four to three is the first special symbol and there are still three working memories of the second special symbol, the target lamp for performing the working memory increasing effect from now on is the seventh lamp, That is, setting is performed for the seventh memory display lamp 340 from the left and the movable body lamp 330 in the movable body 41g. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S720.

  Step S720: The effect control CPU 126 turns off the target memory display lamp 340. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 turns off the target memory display lamp 340 set in the previous step S718. For example, when the target lamp is the seventh memory display lamp 340 from the left, the lamp is turned on. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S722.

  Step S722: The effect control CPU 126 turns off the target movable body. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 turns off the movable body lamp 330 in the target movable body (any of 41a to 41h) set in the previous step S718. For example, when the target lamp is the movable body lamp 330 in the movable body 41g, the target lamp is turned off. The effect control CPU 126 returns to the operation memory effect management process (FIG. 97).

[Direction design management processing]
FIG. 100 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes an execution selection process (step S500), an effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), an effect symbol change process (step S504), an effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and a variable winning device operating. This includes a subroutine group of processing (step S508) and variable winning device operation end processing (step S510). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along each process.

  Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S502 to S510). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the “jump table” as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the situation has not yet started the variation display effect, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation processing (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol variation in-process has been completed, As a jump destination, the effect symbol stop display in-progress process (step S506) is selected. Further, the variable winning device operation processing (step S508) is selected as a jump destination only when the variable winning device management processing (step S5000 in FIG. 39) is selected in the main control CPU 72, and the variable winning device operation end processing is performed. (Step S510) is selected as a jump destination only when the main control CPU 72 selects an end process (step S5500 in FIG. 55) in the variable winning device management process. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

  Step S502: In the effect symbol variation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of preparing conditions for starting the variable display effect using the effect symbol. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, variation pattern, etc.), or produces an effect pattern for the notice effect (reach occurrence other than the pre-reading notice effect pattern). Select a previous notice pattern, a notice pattern after reach, etc.). In addition, the production control CPU 126 also performs demonstration production control when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of the variable display effect using the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button, and an effect corresponding to the result is displayed. The control information on the contents (button effect) is instructed to the display control CPU 146. The effect pattern that is selectively determined in the effect pattern selection process in the preceding effect symbol variation pre-processing (step S502) corresponds to the special reach effect pattern, and the special reach effect ( For example, when the production examples in FIGS. 77 to 80 are executed, a process for setting the movable body display color flag value (special reach production flag setting process) is executed. On the other hand, when the special reach effect is not executed, the movable body display color flag value is reset (the value is set to 0). The specific contents of the special reach production flag setting process will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S506: In the effect symbol stop display processing, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the stop display effect using the effect symbols and moving images in a manner corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) ends the variable display effect that has been actually executed in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. Thereby, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be effectively taught (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player (design effect execution). means). However, in the present embodiment, the stop display effect is executed in a manner similar to or close to that of a loss when two rounds are won or a small hit.

  Step S508: In the variable winning device operation process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the effect during the small hit or the big hit. In this processing, the effect control CPU 126 selects the contents of the prominent effect according to various conditions (for example, winning type). For example, in the case of 16 rounds probable big hit, the effect control CPU 126 selects a 16-round prominent effect pattern as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs this to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). To do. As a result, the image of the big hit effect is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the effect contents change as the round progresses.

  In the case of a 4-round probable big hit, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern for 4 rounds as an effect content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and this is selected for the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). Instruct. As a result, the image of the big hit effect is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the effect contents change as the round progresses.

  Or when it corresponds to "2 round probability variation big hit" (except 2 round probability variation winning in a time shortening state), presentation control CPU126 is good also as performing control which performs a mode transition effect. Further, in the case of “small hit”, the effect control CPU 126 may perform control to execute an effect similar to the mode transition effect (not particularly shown).

  The specific contents of the variable winning device operating process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S510: In the variable winning device operation end process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect contents at the end of the big hit game. In this process, the content of the effect (mode entry effect) that teaches the mode in which the effect control CPU 126 shifts after the big hit game according to various conditions (for example, winning type, chance effect success / failure of big role). Select. For example, in the case of 16 rounds, the fireworks mode entry effect is selected. In the case of 2 rounds, the festival mode entry effect is selected. This is instructed to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). As a result, an image of the mode entry effect at the end of the big hit game is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The specific contents of the variable winning device operation end process will be described later using another flowchart.

[Preliminary design change processing]
FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the above-described effect symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the command for demonstration effect is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

  Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes a demo selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern defines the contents of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the last address of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the contents of the demonstration effect based on the demonstration effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 95) and lamp driving process (step S406 in FIG. 95). To do.

  On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demonstration effect command is not stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

  Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is out of place (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. Note that whether or not the current variation is off can be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. In other words, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is outlier. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is out of sync.

  Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current variation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not stored (No), since only the lottery result command at the time of small hit is left, in this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. Whether or not the current variation is a big hit can also be confirmed based on the variation pattern command or the stop symbol command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the big hit variation, it can be determined that the current variation is a big hit. If the current stop symbol command corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a jackpot.

  Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes a small hit hour variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 (for example, “C0H00H” to “D0H7FH”). The effect pattern number is prepared in advance in pairs with the variation pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect pattern selection table (not shown) and selects the effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time. Can do.

  When the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the effect symbol change schedule (change time, reach type and reach occurrence timing) corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time, stop display The mode and the like are determined. Note that the types of effect symbols determined here correspond to the “combination of symbols at the time of a small hit”.

  The above procedure corresponds to the case of “small hit”, but in the case of “16 round big hit”, “4 round big hit”, or “2 round big hit”, the effect control CPU 126 is “big hit” in step S606. Confirm (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

  Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes a big hit hour fluctuation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command (for example, “E0H00H” to “F0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. The types of effect symbols determined here include those constituting the “combination at the time of two rounds big hit” in addition to those constituting the above “hit combination”. In addition, the combination at the time of 2 round big hits shall be a combination of regular numbers such as “1-2-3” and “3-5-7” as described above (so-called chance win) Can do. Note that, in the big hit effect pattern selection process, the process may be further branched for each big hit stop symbol.

  In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. In other words, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that there is a shift in step S604 (Yes), it next executes step S612.

  Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes a deviation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of deviation based on the variation pattern command (for example, “A0H00H” to “A6H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of losing are classified into “ordinary deviation fluctuation”, “short-time deviation fluctuation”, “outlier reach fluctuation”, and the like, and a fine reach fluctuation pattern is defined in “outlier reach fluctuation”. Note that which effect pattern number is selected by the effect control CPU 126 is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

  When the effect pattern number at the time of detachment is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the effect symbol change schedule corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time (change time, presence / absence of reach, occurrence of reach) , Reach type and reach occurrence timing) and stop display mode (for example, “7”-“2”-“4”, etc.).

  When any one of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

  Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes a notice selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect by lottery. The content of the notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is for notifying the player of the possibility that the reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or for notifying that there is a possibility that it will eventually be a big hit. Therefore, the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be relatively high to increase the player's expectation at the time of winning. The special movable effect is also a kind of notice effect, and for example, when a super reach effect is executed and a specific effect execution condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 126 selects the notice effect pattern. (Special movable production execution means).

  Step S616: The effect control CPU 126 executes a mode effect management process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting various background images according to the internal state. Based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here, various stay mode effects are executed. Note that the details of the specific control will be described later using still another flowchart.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent effect symbol variation processing (step S504 in FIG. 100), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (effect execution means), and various A notice effect is executed based on the notice effect pattern.

[Mode production management process]
FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the mode effect management process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S900: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current mode is the “normal mode”. The confirmation of the mode can be realized by confirming the main control mode status command stored in the command buffer area of the RAM 130.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current mode is the normal mode (step S900: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S908. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the current mode is not the normal mode (step S900: No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S902.

  Step S902: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the current mode is the “festival mode”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current mode is the festival mode (step S902: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S910. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the current mode is not the festival mode (step S902: No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S904.

  Step S904: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the current mode is “night mode”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current mode is the night mode (step S904: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S905. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the current mode is not the night mode (step S904: No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S907.

  Step S905: The production control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a successful production (all movable body standing success production) has been executed during the execution of the big hit game. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the successful presentation has been executed can be made by setting the successful presentation executed flag to ON when the successful presentation has been executed.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that a successful effect has been executed during the execution of the jackpot game (step S905: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S906. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the successful effect has been executed during the execution of the big hit game (step S905: No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S907. For this reason, even if the main control CPU 72 determines that it is in the night mode, if the successful effect is not executed (if the condition execution conditions for the night mode are not satisfied), the effect control CPU 126 displays the effect contents as the fireworks mode. Will be processed.

  Step S906: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not a special reach effect (reach effect in the night mode) has already been executed. The reason for this confirmation is that even if the value of the main control mode status indicates the value corresponding to the night mode, after the special reach effect is executed, the main control mode is preceded, and the fireworks mode is displayed on the effect. This is because of the transition. Note that whether or not the special reach effect has been executed can be determined by setting the executed flag to ON when the special reach effect is executed.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the special reach effect has already been executed (step S906: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S907. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the special reach effect has not yet been executed (step S906: No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S912.

  Step S907: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the variation pattern selected this time is a special reach variation pattern (variation pattern after special reach or shift variation pattern after special reach). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm whether or not the special reach variation pattern is selected by confirming the variation pattern command.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the special reach variation pattern is selected (step S907: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S912. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the special reach variation pattern is not selected (step S907: No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S914.

Step S908: The effect control CPU 126 executes processing for selecting a background image for the normal mode. Specifically, the process of selecting the background image (B) in FIG. 63 is executed.
Step S910: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image for the festival mode. Specifically, the process of selecting the background image (I) in FIG. 70 is executed.

Step S912: The effect control CPU 126 executes processing for selecting a background image for the night mode. Specifically, the process of selecting the background image (A) in FIG. 88 is executed. When step S912 is executed via step S907, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern to be changed from the background image for the fireworks mode to the background image for the night mode during the change, not at the start of the change.
Step S914: The effect control CPU 126 executes processing for selecting a background image for the fireworks mode. Specifically, the process of selecting the background image in FIG. 68 (A) is executed.

  In any case, when the process of step S908, step S910, step S912, or step S914 is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-process (FIG. 101).

[Variation effect pattern selection processing at the time of disconnection (variation display effect pattern selection means)]
FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the off-time variation effect pattern selection process (step S612 in FIG. 101). Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S650: The effect control CPU 126 determines a variable effect pattern number related to the effect symbol. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 corresponds to the change effect pattern determination random number shifted in the previous effect random number update process (step S410 in FIG. 95) and the change pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 (analyzed change pattern command). The variation effect pattern number of the effect symbol is selectively determined on the basis of the “variation pattern number) and the reference“ change effect pattern selection table at the time of deviation ”. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sequentially compares the shifted variation effect pattern determination random number value with the “comparison value” in the above-mentioned variation effect pattern selection table at the time of deviation, and the random value is less than or equal to the comparison value. If there is, the variation effect pattern number corresponding to the comparison value is selected (variation effect pattern determining means).

  Further, in addition to the determination of the variation effect pattern number, the stop display or temporary stop display mode using the effect symbols may be determined in this process. Specifically, the mode (for example, “8”-“1”-“3” in FIG. 63E (E) in FIG. 63) may be determined at the time of stop display by the effect design.

[Exiting variation pattern selection table]
FIG. 104 is a diagram showing an example of the off-time variation effect pattern selection table.
In the variation effect pattern selection table at the time of loss, a plurality of types of effects, for example, “non-reach effect”, “reach effect” (for example, FIG. 64), “special reach effect” (for example, FIG. To FIG. 80), a variation pattern corresponding to “special reach production” (for example, FIG. 89) is defined, and one of the variation patterns is selected. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, and the like. Also, the normal reach production is classified into a plurality of normal reach productions such as normal reach production 1, normal reach production 2 and the like, and each is set corresponding to the variable production pattern number. Similarly, the long reach effect and the super reach effect are also classified finely and are set corresponding to the variable effect pattern numbers. In addition to these reach effects, a special reach effect (a reach effect including a special movable effect by a movable body, for example, FIGS. 77 to 80) is defined. It is finely classified into a plurality of special reach effects such as reach effect 2, etc., and each is set corresponding to the variable effect pattern number.

  Further, the special variation production (reach production executed in the night mode) is defined in the variation variation pattern selection table at the time of loss, and the special reach production includes a plurality of special reach production 1, special reach production 2, and the like. It is finely classified into special reach effects, and each is set corresponding to the variable effect pattern number.

  In addition, the variation effect pattern selection table at the time of loss is a structure in which, for each variation pattern number, “comparison value” and “variation effect pattern number” are stored as a set in order from the head address. For example, when the variation pattern number at the time of loss is “6” (shift variation pattern 6 after reach), the “comparison value” includes values “11”, “21”,. , “231”,..., And “variation effect pattern number” “100601”, “100602”,..., “100611”, “100612”, ... are assigned. Note that the maximum value of the comparison value is 255 (FFH) corresponding to the maximum value of the random effect pattern determination random number.

  For example, the variation effect pattern numbers “100601” and “100602” correspond to the variation effect pattern in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a state of being off after the reach effect is performed. The variation effect pattern numbers “100611” and “100612” correspond to the variation effect pattern in which the special reach effect is performed and then the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a shift manner.

  The effect control CPU 126 sequentially compares the obtained random effect pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the above variable effect pattern selection table. Select the corresponding variation pattern number. For example, if the variation pattern number is “6” and the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “222”, the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “11”. The effect control CPU 126 compares the next comparison value “21” with the random value. Then, the comparison between the random value and the comparison value is continued in order, and when the comparison value is “231”, the random control value is equal to or less than the comparison value, so the effect control CPU 126 selects “100612” as the corresponding variable effect pattern number. To do. Note that the variation effect pattern content of the variation effect pattern number “100612” is “special reach variation effect pattern 02 at the time of loss”, specifically, the special reach effect 02 is performed, and finally in the form of deviation. The effect symbol is the content that is stopped and displayed.

  In the second column from the bottom of the table, a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern number “45” is defined. The variation effect pattern contents of the variation effect pattern numbers “300101” and “300102” are “unreachable non-reach variation effect patterns”, specifically, the reach effect is not executed in the night mode, and finally The effect symbols are displayed in a stopped state. In addition, although not specifically illustrated, “non-reach fluctuation effect pattern at the time of loss” is also selected for the fluctuation pattern numbers “41” to “44”.

  In addition, in the lowest column of this table, a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern number “46” is defined. The variation effect pattern contents of the variation effect pattern numbers “300201” and “300202” are “special reach change effect pattern at the time of loss”. Specifically, the special reach effect is executed in the night mode, and finally, it is lost. In this manner, the effect design is stopped and displayed. Although not specifically illustrated, “Extraordinary special reach fluctuation effect pattern” is also selected for the fluctuation pattern numbers “47” and “48”.

[Variation production pattern selection table when winning 16 rounds big hit]
FIG. 105 is a variation effect pattern selection table at the time of 16 round big hit winning.
In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to 16 rounds probable big hit, for example, the “reach effect” is generated to produce a big hit. In the “16 rounds big win winning variation production pattern selection table”, variation production patterns corresponding to multiple types of “reach production”, “special reach production”, and “special reach production” are defined. In the case of hitting a big hit, one of the variation patterns is selected from the same as in the case of a loss.

  Similarly, the 16-round big win winning variation effect pattern selection table also has a structure in which “comparison value” and “variable effect pattern number” are set and stored in order from the head address for each variation pattern number. is there. For example, when the variation pattern number at the time of big hit for 16 rounds is “19” (variation pattern 19 after reach), the “comparison value” includes values “11”, “21”,. 151 ”,“ 161 ”,... Are provided for each“ comparison value ”, and“ 200701 ”,“ 200702 ”,... , ... are assigned. Note that the maximum value of the comparison value is 255 (FFH) corresponding to the maximum value of the random effect pattern determination random number.

  For example, the variation effect pattern numbers “200701” and “200702” correspond to the variation effect pattern in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a 16-round jackpot after the reach effect is performed. Further, the variable effect pattern numbers “2000071” and “200672” correspond to the variable effect pattern in which the special reach effect is performed and then the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a 16-round big hit mode.

  The effect control CPU 126 sequentially compares the obtained random effect pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the above variable effect pattern selection table. Select the corresponding variation pattern number. For example, if the fluctuation pattern number is “19” and the fluctuation pattern determination random value at that time is “155”, the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “11”. The effect control CPU 126 compares the next comparison value “21” with the random value. Then, the comparison between the random value and the comparison value is continued in order, and when the comparison value is “161”, the random control value is equal to or less than the comparison value, and therefore the effect control CPU 126 selects “200712” as the corresponding variable effect pattern number. To do. Note that the variation effect pattern content of the variation effect pattern number “200722” is “special reach variation effect pattern 61 at the time of big hit”, specifically, the special reach effect is performed, and then the effect is made in the form of 16 rounds of big hit. The symbol is the content that is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern number “53” is defined in the lowermost column of the table. The variation effect pattern contents of the variation effect pattern numbers “400101” and “400102” are “special reach variation effect pattern at the time of big hit”, specifically, the special reach effect is executed in the night mode and finally won. In this manner, the effect design is stopped and displayed. Although not specifically shown, “special reach variation effect pattern at big hit” is also selected for the variation pattern numbers “54” to “60”.

[Refer to Fig. 103: Variation effect pattern selection processing at the time of loss]
When the variable effect pattern number related to the effect symbol is determined (step S650), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S652.

  Step S652: The effect control CPU 126 sets a variable effect pattern related to the effect symbol. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 changes the effect symbol corresponding to the variable effect pattern number while referring to the effect pattern selection table for the change schedule of the effect symbol corresponding to the variable effect pattern number determined in the previous step S650. Determine the production schedule. Specifically, schedules such as the timing of the start and end of the fluctuating display effect by the effect design, the timing of the start and temporary stop of the special pseudo-variable effect, the timing of the pseudo-continuous effect, the timing of the start and end of the reach effect, etc. Set up. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S654.

  Step S654: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not to execute the special reach effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the content of the variable effect pattern corresponding to the variable effect pattern number determined in the previous step S650 includes the special reach effect. For example, the variable effect pattern numbers “100611”, “100612”,..., “100711”, “100712”,..., “1000081”, “100812”,. It has become. As a result of this confirmation, when the special reach effect is executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S656. On the other hand, when the special reach effect is not executed (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S660.

  Step S656: The effect control CPU 126 sets a special reach effect pattern. Specifically, the production content (schedule) of the special reach production corresponding to the variation production pattern number decided in the previous step S650 is decided. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S658.

  Step S658: The effect control CPU 126 executes setting of a special effect (special movable effect) by the movable body. Specifically, based on the production contents (schedule) of the special reach effect set in the previous step S656, the operation contents of the movable bodies 41a to 41h and the display color of the movable body lamp 330 in the movable bodies 41a to 41h are displayed. Production contents related to the movable body, such as the lighting mode, are set.

For example, the standing / falling state of the movable bodies 41a to 41h and the lighting / extinguishing state of each movable body lamp 330 are set based on the contents (schedule) of the special reach effect. Specifically, the following setting is performed.
(1) First, at the time of starting the special reach production, all the movable bodies 41a to 41h are in a collapsed state, and the basic display color (white display color) is used for several operating memories (those related to the first special design and the second special design A setting is made to turn on the movable body lamp 330 in the movable body (for example, (G) in FIG. 77).
(2) Standing up all the movable bodies 41a to 41h, changing the display color to the yellow display color, and setting the lighting of the movable body lamps 330 corresponding to several working memories (for example, (H) in FIG. 77, (I) in FIG. 77).
(3) The setting is made so that all the movable bodies 41a to 41h are tilted in a state where the movable body lamps 330 corresponding to several working memories are lit without changing the display color as they are (for example, (J) in FIG. 78).
(4) All the movable bodies 41a to 41h are erected, the display color is changed to the green display color, and the movable body lamps 330 corresponding to several working memories are turned on (for example, (K) in FIG. 78). .
(5) The setting is made so that all the movable bodies 41a to 41h are tilted in a state where the movable body lamps 330 corresponding to several working memories are turned on without changing the display color (for example, (L) in FIG. 78).
(6) The setting is made so that all the movable bodies 41a to 41h are erected in the state where the movable body lamps 330 corresponding to several working memories are turned on without changing the display color (for example, (M) in FIG. 79).
(7) The setting is made so that all the movable bodies 41a to 41h are tilted while the display colors are not changed as they are and the movable body lamps 330 corresponding to several working memories are turned on (for example, (N) in FIG. 79).
(8) All the movable bodies 41a to 41h are erected, the display color is changed to the red display color, and the movable body lamps 330 corresponding to several working memories are turned on (for example, (O) in FIG. 79). .
(9) The setting is made so that all the movable bodies 41a to 41h are tilted while the display colors are not changed as they are and the movable body lamps 330 corresponding to several working memories are turned on (for example, (P) in FIG. 80).
(10) All the movable bodies 41a to 41h are erected, the display color is changed to the rainbow display color, and the movable body lamps 330 corresponding to several working memories are turned on (for example, (Q) in FIG. 80) ).
(11) The display color is not changed as it is, and the setting is made such that all the movable bodies 41a to 41h are brought down while the movable body lamps 330 corresponding to several working memories are turned on (for example, (R) in FIG. 80).
(12) Thereafter, the above (10) and (11) are repeated until the special reach effect is finished.

  When the setting of the production contents related to the movable body is completed, the production control CPU 126 returns to the production symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 101).

  Step S660: The effect control CPU 126 sets other reach effect patterns. Specifically, the effect content (schedule) of the reach effect corresponding to the variable effect pattern number determined in the previous step S650 is determined. If the reach effect is not executed, nothing is set and the next process is executed. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S662.

  Step S662: The effect control CPU 126 sets other effects. Specifically, the production content is set based on the production content (schedule) of the reach production set in the previous step S660. The effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 101).

[Special reach production flag setting process]
FIG. 106 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special reach effect flag setting process. This special reach effect flag setting process is one of the processes performed during the effect symbol changing process (step S504 in FIG. 100). Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S770: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the display color of the movable body has been changed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the display color of the movable body lamp 330 in the movable bodies 41a to 41h is the same as the display color at the time when this process was performed last time. For example, assuming that the previous confirmation was a yellow display color, if the current confirmation was a green display color, the result was that the display color of the movable object was changed. If there is, the result that the display color of the movable body is not changed is obtained. As a result of this confirmation, when it is confirmed that the display color of the movable body has been changed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S772. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the display color of the movable body has not been changed (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol changing process (FIG. 100).

  Step S772: The effect control CPU 126 sets a movable body display color flag value corresponding to the display color. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sets the movable body display color flag value stored in the flag buffer area of the RAM 130 to a value corresponding to the display color in which the movable body lamps 330 in the movable bodies 41a to 41h are lit. Change to and set.

  For example, when the display color of the movable body lamp 330 in the movable body changes from the basic display color (white display color) to the yellow display color, the movable body display color flag value is changed from 00H to 01H. Similarly, when the yellow display color is changed to the green display color, the movable body display color flag value is changed from 01H to 02H, and when the green display color is changed to the red display color, the movable body display color flag value is changed from 02H. When the color is changed to 03H and changed from the red display color to the rainbow color, the movable body display color flag value is changed from 03H to 04H.

  As described above, when the display color in which the movable body lamps 330 in the movable bodies 41a to 41h are turned on is changed, the movable body display color flag value is changed and set, so that when the working memory is increased. The display color of the movable body to be newly lit can be made the same as the display color of other movable bodies that have been lit up until now. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the uncomfortable feeling caused by the difference in lighting of the lamp due to the increase in working memory (winning) during a special performance.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol changing process (FIG. 100).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 107 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of processing when the variable winning device is activated. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S710: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current state is in a big role (a big hit). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the status designation command that is a major player is stored. As a result of the confirmation, if it is confirmed that the player is in a big role (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S712. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the player is not playing a major role (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S711.

  Step S711: The effect control CPU 126 executes a small hit effect selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern to be executed during the opening / closing operation (for example, 2 to 4 times) of the variable winning device 30 with a small hit.

  Step S712: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the current big hit is a two-round big hit. This confirmation can be performed based on a stop symbol command stored in the command buffer area of the RAM 130, for example. As a result of the confirmation, if the stop symbol command is a two-round jackpot symbol (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S715. On the other hand, if the stop symbol command is not a two-round jackpot symbol (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S714.

  Step S714: The effect control CPU 126 executes a big hit effect selection process. The specific contents will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S715: The effect control CPU 126 executes a special winning opening twice opening effect selection process. In this process, for example, the effect pattern at the time of the mode transition after the special effect symbol is stopped and displayed is selected as the effect content during the big round two. Then, when the effect control CPU 126 returns from the double winning opening twice effect selection process, the process returns to the above-described variable winning device operation process.

[Big hit effect selection process]
FIG. 108 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the big hit effect selection process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S810: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not it is a 16R (round) big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the stop symbol command, and determines whether the command corresponds to “16 round probability variation symbol 1” or “16 round probability variation symbol 2”, or “4 It is confirmed whether the command corresponds to the “round probability variable symbol 1” or “4 round probability variable symbol 2”. If the result of this confirmation is a 16R (round) big hit (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S812. On the other hand, when it is not 16R (round) big hit (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S814.

  Step S812: The effect control CPU 126 executes a 16R (round) big hit effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect executed during the 16-round big hit game. The specific contents of the 16R (round) big hit effect selection process will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S814: The effect control CPU 126 executes a 4R (round) big hit effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect executed during the 4-round big hit game. The specific contents of the 4R (round) big hit effect selection process will be described later using another flowchart.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the variable winning device operating process (FIG. 107).

[16R big hit effect selection processing]
FIG. 109 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the 16R big hit effect selection process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S730: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the 16R big hit effect selection process is the first activation (calling). The confirmation of whether or not it is the first activation may be performed, for example, with a 16R big hit effect selection process flag that is reset at the start of the big hit game in the RAM 130. If the 16R big hit effect selection processing flag is not set, it is determined that the activation is the first time, and the 16R big hit effect selection processing flag is set. If the 16R big hit effect selection processing flag is set, it is determined that the activation is not the first time. If the result of this confirmation is the first activation (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S734. On the other hand, if it is not the first activation (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S731.

  Step S731: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the sixth round has been started. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the round number command, and the command stored so far is changed to a command corresponding to the “sixth round” and stored. Confirm whether or not. As a result of this confirmation, when it is confirmed that the “sixth round” has been started (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S732. On the other hand, when it is not confirmed that the “sixth round” has started (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S735.

  Step S732: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether there are five or more working memories. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the effect command when the (special symbol) working memory number increases or the effect command when the (special symbol) operation memory number decreases, It is confirmed whether the total value of the number of working memories corresponding to one special symbol and the number of working memories corresponding to the second special symbol is 5 or more. As a result of this confirmation, when the number of working memories is 5 or more (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S732a. On the other hand, when the number of working memories is not 5 or more (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S734. As described above, regarding the execution condition of the player participation type effect (special effect), by setting a limit on the number of memories, it is possible to raise the hurdle whether or not the player participation type effect is executed. The value of participatory production can be increased.

  Step S732a: The production control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the scenario system production is a big hit. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 confirms the number of consecutive big hits (number of consecutive resorts), and determines that it is a big hit to execute a scenario-type production when it is the first big hit or the fifth consecutive resort big hit. To do. As a result of the confirmation, if it is confirmed that the scenario-based effect is a big hit to be executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S734. On the other hand, if it is confirmed that the scenario-based effect is not a big hit to be executed (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S732b.

  In this way, when the scenario-based big-acting effect is executed, the special effect (player participation type effect) is not executed. Then, by executing such a scenario-based prominent effect in preference to the special effect, the effect relating to the game can be advanced more smoothly.

Step S732b: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current jackpot is a win with a specific symbol (16-round probability variable symbol 1). Specifically, the stop symbol command is confirmed to confirm whether or not the current jackpot corresponds to a specific symbol.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the current jackpot is a win with a specific symbol (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S732c. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the big hit this time is not a win with a specific symbol (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S732d. In this way, by adding the fact that it corresponds to a specific symbol to the execution conditions for special effects (player participation type effects), the conditions under which the special effects are executed can be tightened, and the value of the special effects is increased. be able to.

Step S732c: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not there is a special reach variation pattern in the memory. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm whether there is a special reach variation pattern in the memory by confirming the variation pattern destination determination command.
As a result of this confirmation, when it is confirmed that there is a special reach variation pattern in the memory (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S733. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that there is no special reach variation pattern in the memory (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S732d.

Step S732d: The effect control CPU 126 determines whether or not to execute a failure limited effect (a player participation type effect that always fails; a so-called Gasse effect) (failure limited player participation type effect execution means). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 determines that the failure-limited effect is executed when the effect random number is selected and the effect random number is selected.
And when it is judged that a failure limited effect is performed (Yes), effect control CPU126 performs step S733 next. On the other hand, when it is determined that the failure limited effect is not executed (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S734. By appropriately executing such a failure limited effect, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the special effect.

  Step S733: The effect control CPU 126 sets the 16R special effect flag to ON. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130, sets the value of the 16R special effect flag to 01H, and stores it. Here, the “16R special effect flag” is a flag used to determine whether or not to execute a special effect (for example, FIG. 81 to FIG. 87, etc.) during the 16-round big hit game. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S735.

  Step S734: The effect control CPU 126 sets (resets) the 16R special effect flag to OFF. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130, sets the value of the 16R special effect flag to 00H, and stores it. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S735.

  Step S735: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the number of rounds of the big hit game currently being performed is the first to fifth rounds. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the round number command, and the command corresponding to one of “1 round” to “5 rounds” is currently stored. Check if is saved. As a result of this confirmation, if it is confirmed that the current number of rounds is “1st to 5th rounds” (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S736. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the current number of rounds is not “1st to 5th rounds” (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S737.

  Step S736: The effect control CPU 126 executes a preparation effect setting process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes setting of a preparation effect that is executed during the first to fifth rounds in the big hit game. For example, an effect that teaches that 5 or more working memories are required as a condition for starting a bass chance game (special effect) to be performed during a big hit game that allows the player to enter the night mode after the big hit game ends ( For example, FIG. 81), an effect when the number of working memories is 1 to 4 (for example, FIG. 82), an effect when the number of working memories is 5 or more (for example, (G) in FIG. 83), etc. Execute the setting. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S737.

  Step S737: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the number of rounds of the big hit game currently being performed is the sixth to tenth rounds and the 16R special effect flag is ON. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 first accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the round number command, and the currently stored command corresponds to any of “6 rounds” to “10 rounds”. Check whether the command to be saved is saved. Next, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130, checks the value of the 16R special effect flag, and checks whether the flag value is 01H (ON). As a result of these two confirmations, when it is confirmed that the current number of rounds is “6th to 10th round” and the 16R special effect flag is ON (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S738. Execute. On the other hand, if it is confirmed that the current number of rounds is not “6th to 10th round”, or if the 16R special effect flag is not ON (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S739.

  Step S738: The effect control CPU 126 executes a 16R big hit special effect setting process. For example, a setting process for a bass chance chance effect (special effect) that is executed between the sixth and tenth rounds in the big hit game is executed. The specific contents will be described later using still another flowchart. When this process ends, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the big hit effect setting process (FIG. 108).

  Step S739: The effect control CPU 126 executes a 16R big hit normal effect setting process. For example, an effect that a female character grieves or character information such as “sorry ...” appears due to the fact that the Bashibashi chance game (special effect) has not started in the sixth round during the jackpot game (for example, 90 (G)), an effect such as displaying the number of rounds currently being performed in the upper left part of the display screen is set. When this process ends, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the big hit effect setting process (FIG. 108). In addition, when the baseball chance game is not started in the sixth round during the big hit game, the production control CPU 126 sets a scenario-type big role production or a non-scenario type big-time production according to the number of consecutive big hits (special). (Game effect execution means, special special game effect execution means).

[4R big hit effect selection processing]
FIG. 110 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the 4R big hit effect selection process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S740: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the procedure of the 4R big hit effect selection process is the first activation (calling). The confirmation of whether or not it is the first activation may be performed, for example, with a 4R big hit effect selection process flag that is reset at the start of the big hit game in the RAM 130. If the 4R big hit effect selection processing flag is not set, it is determined that the activation is the first time, and the 4R big hit effect selection processing flag is set. If the 4R big hit effect selection processing flag is set, it is determined that the activation is not the first time. As a result of the confirmation, if it is the first activation (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S744. On the other hand, if it is not the first activation (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S741.

  Step S741: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the second round has been started. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the round number command, and the command stored so far is changed to a command corresponding to the “second round” and stored. Confirm whether or not. As a result of this confirmation, when it is confirmed that the “second round” has been started (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S742. On the other hand, when it is not confirmed that the “second round” has started (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S745.

  Step S742: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether there are five or more working memories. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the effect command when the (special symbol) working memory number increases or the effect command when the (special symbol) operation memory number decreases, It is confirmed whether the total value of the number of working memories corresponding to one special symbol and the number of working memories corresponding to the second special symbol is 5 or more. As a result of the confirmation, if there are five or more working memories (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S742a. On the other hand, when the number of working memories is not five or more (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S744.

  Step S742a: The production control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the scenario-type production is a big hit. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 confirms the number of consecutive big hits (number of consecutive resorts), and determines that it is a big hit to execute a scenario-type production when it is the first big hit or the fifth consecutive resort big hit. To do. As a result of the confirmation, if it is confirmed that the scenario-based effect is a big hit to be executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S744. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the scenario-based effect is not a big hit to be executed (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S742b.

Step S742b: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current jackpot is a win with a specific symbol (four-round probability variable symbol 1). Specifically, the stop symbol command is confirmed to confirm whether or not the current jackpot corresponds to a specific symbol.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the current jackpot is a win with a specific symbol (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S742c. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the big hit this time is not a win with a specific symbol (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S742d.

Step S742c: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not there is a special reach variation pattern in the memory. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm whether there is a special reach variation pattern in the memory by confirming the variation pattern destination determination command.
As a result of this confirmation, when it is confirmed that there is a special reach variation pattern in the memory (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S743. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that there is no special reach variation pattern in the memory (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S742d.

Step S742d: The effect control CPU 126 determines whether or not to execute the failure limited effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 determines that the failure-limited effect is executed when the effect random number is selected and the effect random number is selected.
If it is determined that the failure limited effect is to be executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S743. On the other hand, when it is determined that the failure limited effect is not executed (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S744.

  Step S743: The effect control CPU 126 sets the 4R special effect flag to ON. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130, sets the value of the 4R special effect flag to 01H, and stores it. Here, the “4R special effect flag” is a flag used to determine whether or not to execute a special effect (not shown) during the 4-round big hit game. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S745.

  Step S744: The effect control CPU 126 sets (resets) the 4R special effect flag to OFF. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130, sets the value of the 4R special effect flag to 00H, and stores it. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S745.

  Step S745: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the number of rounds of the big hit game currently being performed is the first round. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the round number command, and determines whether or not a command corresponding to “1 round” as the currently stored command is stored. Check. As a result of this confirmation, when it is confirmed that the current round number is “the first round” (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S746. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the current number of rounds is not the “first round” (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S747.

  Step S746: The effect control CPU 126 executes a preparation effect setting process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes setting of a preparation effect that is executed in the first round during the big hit game. For example, an effect that teaches that 5 or more working memories are required as a condition for starting a bass chance game (special effect) to be performed during a big hit game that allows the player to enter the night mode after the big hit game ends ( For example, FIG. 81), an effect when the number of working memories is 1 to 4 (for example, FIG. 82), an effect when the number of working memories is 5 or more (for example, (G) in FIG. 83), etc. Execute the setting. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S747.

  Step S747: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the number of rounds of the big hit game currently being performed is the 2nd to 4th rounds and the 4R special effect flag is ON. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 first accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the round number command, and the currently stored command corresponds to one of “2 rounds” to “4 rounds”. Check whether the command to be saved is saved. Next, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the value of the 4R special effect flag, and confirms whether or not the flag value is 01H (ON). As a result of these two confirmations, when it is confirmed that the current number of rounds is “2nd to 4th round” and the 4R special effect flag is ON (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S748. Execute. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the current number of rounds is not “2nd to 4th round”, or when the 4R special effect flag is not ON (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S749.

  Step S748: The effect control CPU 126 executes a 4R big hit special effect setting process. For example, the setting process of the bass chance chance effect (special effect) executed between the second round and the fourth round in the big hit game is executed. In addition, since the specific content is the same as that of another flowchart (16R big hit special effect setting process), it abbreviate | omits. When this process ends, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the big hit effect setting process (FIG. 108).

  Step S749: The effect control CPU 126 executes a 4R big hit normal effect setting process. For example, an effect that a female character grieves or character information such as “sorry ...” appears due to the fact that the Bashibashi chance game (special effect) has not started in the first round during the jackpot game (see FIG. (Not shown), or an effect such as displaying the number of rounds currently being performed in the upper left part of the display screen. When this process ends, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the big hit effect setting process (FIG. 108).

[16R jackpot special performance setting process]
FIG. 111 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of 16R big hit special effect setting processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example. Note that the same process as the 16R jackpot special effect setting process can be executed for the 4R jackpot special symbol effect setting process.

  Step S750: The effect control CPU 126 executes a special effect management process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a setting process of a bass chance opportunity effect (special effect) (player participation type effect executing means). The specific contents will be described later using still another flowchart. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S752.

  Step S752: The effect control CPU 126 executes other effect setting processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a setting process for an effect different from the special effect, for example, an effect that displays the number of rounds that change as the jackpot game progresses. When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the 16R big hit effect selection process (FIG. 109).

[Special production management process]
FIG. 112 is a flowchart illustrating a configuration example of the special effect management process. The special effect management process includes an execution selection process (step S760), a repeated hit explanation effect setting process (step S761), a movable object effect setting process (step S762), an all-movable body standing success effect setting process (step S763), and an all-movable object. This is a configuration including a subroutine (program module) group of the standing failure production setting process (step S764). Here, first, the basic flow of the special effect management process will be described along each process.

  Step S760: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S761 to S764) from the “jump table”. For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special effect management process in the stack pointer as the return address.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the situation has not yet started the special effect, the effect control CPU 126 selects the repeated hitting explanation effect setting process (step S761) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the repeated stroke explanation effect setting process has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the movable object effect setting process (step S762) as the next jump destination. Further, in the movable body effect setting process, the all movable body standing success effect setting process (step S763) or the all movable body standing failure effect setting process (step S764) is selected as the next jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified by the “jump table” and the process is selected. However, apart from such a selection method, a “process flag”, a “process selection flag”, or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects a process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process in a row, and conditional branching (continuation / return) is performed by referring to the flag one by one at the top step. However, in the selection method of the present embodiment, effect control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 126 to call each process one by one.

  Step S761: In the repeated hitting explanation effect setting process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting an effect that will be described for a bass chance opportunity effect (special effect) to be executed. Specifically, an effect (eg, (H) in FIG. 83) that teaches the player that the “bashibashi chance” has started, an image that imitates the effect switching button 45, and the upper parts of the movable bodies 41a to 41h. A meter divided into five stages, and an effect by a female character, such as “save the meter by button hitting and wake up a role”, to prompt the player to participate in the Bashibashi chance game (for example, in FIG. 83 (I)) is set.

  Step S762: In the movable body effect setting process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting a basic opportunity effect (special effect). The specific contents will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S763: In the all-movable body standing up successful effect setting process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting an effect to be executed when all the movable bodies are erected during the basic opportunity effect (special effect). The specific contents will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S764: In the all-movable body standing-up failure effect setting process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process for setting an effect to be executed when all the movable bodies cannot be raised within the prescribed number of rounds. The specific contents will be described later using another flowchart.

[Moving body effect setting process]
FIG. 113 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the movable body effect setting process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S770: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the procedure for the movable object effect setting process is the first activation (calling). The confirmation of whether or not it is the first activation may be performed, for example, with a movable body effect setting process flag that is reset when the big hit game is started in the RAM 130. If the movable body effect setting process flag is not set, it is determined that it is the first activation, and the movable body effect setting process flag is set. If the movable body effect setting process flag is set, it is determined that the activation is not the first time. As a result of this confirmation, if it is the first activation (Yes), the presentation control CPU 126 next executes step S772. On the other hand, if it is not the first activation (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S771.

  Step S771: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not a prescribed round has been started. For example, in the case of a 16 round jackpot game, it is confirmed whether or not the ninth round has been started, and in the case of a four round jackpot game, it is confirmed whether or not the fourth round has been started. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the stop symbol command and the round number command, and commands corresponding to “16 round probability variable symbol 1” or “16 round probability variable symbol 2”. If it is, it is confirmed whether or not the command stored so far is changed to a command corresponding to “9th round” and stored. In addition, in the case of a command corresponding to “4 round probability variation symbol 1” or “4 round probability variation symbol 2”, whether or not the command stored so far has been changed to a command corresponding to “fourth round” and stored. To check. As a result of this confirmation, when it is confirmed that the “regular round” has started (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S799. On the other hand, when it is not confirmed that the “regular round” has started (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S776.

  Step S772: The effect control CPU 126 resets various flag values. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130 and sets (resets) values such as the effect invalid flag, the winning count value, and the winning information stock value to 00H.

  Step S773: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not a successful effect can be output. The success effect is an effect that may be executed when the entry condition of the night mode is satisfied. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and stores at least one variation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the “special reach variation pattern” among at least five variation pattern destination determination commands. If the variation pattern destination determination command is stored, it is determined that a successful effect can be output. As a result of this confirmation, if it is determined that a successful effect can be output (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S774. On the other hand, when it is determined that the successful effect cannot be output (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S775.

  Step S774: The effect control CPU 126 sets the winning limit number to eight. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130, sets the value of the winning limit number to 08H, and stores it. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S777. By setting the winning limit number to 8, the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h can all stand up.

  Step S775: The effect control CPU 126 sets the winning limit number to seven. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130, sets the value of the winning limit number to 07H, and stores it. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S777. By setting the winning limit number to seven, among the eight movable bodies 41a to 41h, up to seven movable bodies 41a to 41g can be erected, but the remaining one movable body 41h has the effect switching button 45. No matter how many times you press, you will not be able to stand up.

  Step S776: The effect control CPU 126 sets a button pressing effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 displays an image that imitates the effect switching button 45, or causes character information such as “continuous hit!” To appear above the image (for example, FIGS. 84 to 86). Etc. are set. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S777.

  Step S777: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the button has been pressed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect switching button 45 has been operated (pressed). For example, it is confirmed whether or not an operation (pressing) signal is output from the effect switching button 45. If the result of this confirmation is that the button has been pressed (Yes), the presentation control CPU 126 next executes step S778. On the other hand, if the button is not pressed (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S786.

  Step S778: The effect control CPU 126 sets an effect when the button is pressed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 changes and displays an image simulating the effect switching button 45 in the pressed state, or the character information of the pseudo sound “Bashi! Bashi!” Indicating that the effect switching button 45 is pressed. Or the like (for example, FIGS. 84 to 86) is set. In addition, an effect is set so that the meter displayed on the upper part of the movable body is increased by one (up to the fourth upper limit) every time the meter is pressed a few times.

  Step S780: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the winning number value is smaller than the winning limit number value. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the stored winning count value and winning limit count value, and compares the values. As a result of the confirmation, if the winning count value is smaller than the winning limit count value (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S781. On the other hand, when the winning count value is not smaller than the winning limit count value (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S786.

  Step S781: The effect control CPU 126 executes a movable body standing effect lottery. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 causes the movable body to stand up based on the random number for the movable body standing effect lottery shifted in the previous effect random number update process (step S410 in FIG. 95) and the lottery table (not shown). The lottery of whether or not to execute is executed. For example, it may be a movable body standing effect lottery having a lottery probability to win (execute an effect to erect the movable body) with a probability of 1/5. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S783.

  Step S783: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the result of the previous movable body standing effect lottery (step S781) is a win. As a result of this confirmation, if the winning is true (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S784. On the other hand, when it does not correspond to winning (No), presentation control CPU126 performs step S786 next.

  Step S784: The effect control CPU 126 adds 1 to the winning count value and adds 1 to the winning information stock value. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130, changes the value of the number of winning times stored and adds 1 to the value of the winning information stock value, and similarly changes the value of the winning information stock value. Do. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S786. The winning information stock value is a numerical value that increases one by one by winning in the movable body standing effect lottery. If the winning information stock value is larger than 0, even if the winning body lottery effect lottery is not won, one winning information stock value is consumed to win the movable body standing effect lottery.

  Step S786: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the movable body standing effect is currently being performed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, about 1 second) after the movable body standing effect is set and the effect is executed. As a result of this confirmation, when the movable body standing effect is currently being performed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the special effect management process (FIG. 112). On the other hand, when the movable body standing effect is not currently performed (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S788.

  Step S788: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the winning information stock value is larger than zero. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130 and compares the value of the stored winning information stock value with 0. As a result of this confirmation, if the winning information stock value is greater than 0 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S790. On the other hand, when the winning information stock value is not larger than 0 (when it is 0) (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S793.

  Step S790: The effect control CPU 126 sets the movable body standing effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 increases the number of meters displayed on the upper part of the movable body to the maximum number (5) and causes the character information “MAX” to appear on top of the meter, or displays the movable body. Settings such as an effect of newly standing one (for example, FIGS. 84 to 86) are performed. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S791.

  Step S791: The effect control CPU 126 subtracts 1 from the winning information stock value. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130 and performs a change to subtract 1 from the value of the stored winning information stock value. The effect control CPU 126 returns to the special effect management process (FIG. 112).

  Step S793: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the movable body standing effect is finished. Specifically, when this process is executed last time, it is confirmed that the movable body standing effect is being executed, and when this process is executed this time, the movable body standing effect is not being executed. If the result of this confirmation is that the movable body standing effect has been completed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S795. On the other hand, when the movable body standing effect is not finished (that is, when the movable body standing effect is not executed or when the effect is finished and this process is executed a plurality of times) (No), the effect control CPU 126. Returns to the special effect management process (FIG. 112).

  Step S795: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the winning count value is 8. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130 and compares the value of the number of selected winning times with 8. As a result of the confirmation, if the winning count value is 8 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S797. On the other hand, when the winning count value is not 8 (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the special effect management process (FIG. 112).

  Step S797: The effect control CPU 126 sets the all movable body standing success effect setting process (step S763) as the next jump destination in the special effect management process (FIG. 112).

  Step S799: When it is confirmed in the previous step S771 that the specified number of rounds has been started (step S771: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 performs the all movable body standing failure effect setting process (step S764) as the special effect management process (step S764). The next jump destination in FIG. 112) is set. For example, when the 16th round jackpot game starts the 9th round and the 4th round jackpot game starts the 4th round, the all-movable body standing failure production setting process (step S764) is performed in the special production management process (FIG. 112). Set to the next jump destination.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the special effect management process (FIG. 112).

[All movable body standing success production setting processing]
FIG. 114 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of the all-movable body standing-up success effect setting process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S850: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the procedure of this all-movable-body-standing-success effect setting process is the first activation (calling). The confirmation as to whether or not it is the first activation may be performed, for example, with an all-movable-body-standing-success effect setting processing flag that is reset at the start of the big hit game in the RAM 130. If all the movable body standing up successful production setting processing flags are not set, it is determined that the activation is the first time, and the all movable body standing up successful production setting processing flags are set. If the all-movable-body-standing-success effect setting processing flag is set, it is determined that the activation is not the first time. As a result of this confirmation, if it is the first activation (Yes), the presentation control CPU 126 next executes step S852. On the other hand, if it is not the first activation (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S854.

  Step S852: The effect control CPU 126 sets the all movable body standing flag to ON. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130 and sets (inputs) 01H to the value of all the movable upright flags stored. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S854.

  Step S854: The effect control CPU 126 sets the all movable body standing success effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sets an effect (for example, (Q) in FIG. 86) for causing character information such as “great success!” To appear in the center of the screen. At the same time, it is possible to set an effect that repeats the operation such that all the movable bodies 41a to 41h stand up or fall down. In addition, when a certain amount of time has passed and 9 rounds of the big hit game are started, an effect (for example, (R) in FIG. 86) is set so that character information such as “Get Night Mode!” Appears in the center of the screen. Do. In addition, when 10 rounds of the big hit game are started, an effect (for example, (S) in FIG. 87) is set so that a female character appears and character information such as “I did it!” Appears in the center of the screen. .

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the special effect management process (FIG. 112).

[All movable body standing failure production setting processing]
FIG. 115 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the all-movable body standing-up failure effect setting process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S855: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the procedure of the all movable body standing failure effect setting process is the first activation (calling). The confirmation as to whether or not it is the first activation may be performed, for example, with an all-moving body standing failure production setting process flag that is reset when the big hit game is started in the RAM 130. If the all movable body standing failure production setting processing flag is not set, it is determined that the activation is the first time, and the all movable body standing failure production setting processing flag is set. If the all movable body standing failure production setting processing flag is set, it is determined that the activation is not the first time. If the result of this confirmation is the first activation (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S857. On the other hand, if it is not the first activation (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S859.

  Step S857: The effect control CPU 126 resets the all movable body standing flag to OFF. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130 and sets (inputs) 00H to the value of all the movable standing flags stored. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S859.

  Step S859: The effect control CPU 126 sets the all movable body standing failure effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 performs setting of an effect (for example, (R) in FIG. 91) for causing character information such as “not get night mode ...” to appear in the center of the screen. After that, when 10 rounds of the jackpot game are started, an effect (for example, (S) in FIG. 91) is set so that a female character appears and character information such as “sorry ...” appears in the center of the screen. .

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the special effect management process (FIG. 112).

[Processing at the end of variable award winning device operation]
FIG. 116 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of the variable winning device operation end process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S880: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the all movable body standing flag is ON. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the value of all the movable upright flags stored is 01H. If the result of this confirmation is that the all movable body standing flag is ON (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S882. On the other hand, when the all movable body standing flag is not ON (when it is OFF) (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S884.

  Step S882: The effect control CPU 126 executes night mode entry effect setting. Specifically, a “night mode entry effect” (for example, (U) in FIG. 87) performed at the end of the big hit game (end process) is set. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S886.

  Step S884: The effect control CPU 126 executes the fireworks mode entry effect setting. Specifically, “Fireworks mode entry effect” (for example, (D) in FIG. 65, (I) in FIG. 90, (U) in FIG. 92), etc., performed at the end of the big hit game (end process) is set. Is done. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S886.

  Step S886: The effect control CPU 126 sets the effect symbol variation pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination in the effect symbol management process (FIG. 100). When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 100).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a player participation type effect (basibashi chance) having a position as a judgment effect whether or not a special mode effect (night mode effect) is executed is performed on the player himself. If the player does not participate in the player participatory production, it is possible to reduce the feeling that the player participatory production is a “finished race” by not entering the night mode after the end of the big hit game.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented with various modifications. The aspect of the effect mentioned in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the aspect of the effect described above.

  In the embodiment, an example is given in which the ball sorting device 200 is arranged separately from the rolling stage 40e. For example, the ball sorting device 200 is integrated into the rolling stage 40e (so-called stage object). May be. In this case, for example, when the inflow port 202 is formed at the center saddle position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game balls rolling on the rolling stage 40e enter the inflow port 202 at random, the balls are integrated with the rolling stage 40e. A sorting operation similar to that of the embodiment may be performed inside the device 200 and may be discharged from the first discharge port 204 or the second discharge port 203 into the game area 8a. The released game balls can be randomly selected at the right start winning port 26 or the variable start winning device 28 (left start winning port 28a).

  The images given in other production examples are merely examples, and these can be appropriately modified. Further, the structure, board configuration, specific set values, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the figure, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately modified.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board unit 8a Game area 20 Start gate 26 Right start winning port 28 Variable start winning device 28a Left start winning port 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation memory lamp 34 1st special symbol display device 35 2nd special Symbol display device 34a First special symbol operation memory lamp 35a Second special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game state display device 42 Liquid crystal display device 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU
200 Ball Sorting Device 201 Sorting Guide Path 205 Rotating Body 203 Second Release Port 204 First Release Port 208, 209 Rectification Guide Path 200 Ball Sorting Device

Claims (3)

When the lottery trigger occurs during the game, an internal lottery execution means for executing an internal lottery,
When the internal lottery is executed by the internal lottery execution means, the symbol display means for displaying the symbols in a manner according to the result of the internal lottery after the symbols are displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined fluctuation time;
Variation pattern defining means for preliminarily defining a plurality of types of variation patterns including special variation patterns for the variation pattern of the symbols that are variably displayed by the symbol display means;
A variation pattern determining means for selectively determining any one of the plurality of types of the variation patterns defined by the variation pattern defining means when executing the symbol variation display by the symbol display means;
As a result of the internal lottery corresponding to winning, special game execution means for executing a special game triggered by the symbol being displayed in a manner representing winning by the symbol display means;
A lottery element for acquiring a lottery element to be used for the internal lottery by the internal lottery execution means when the lottery trigger occurs before the start condition that allows the symbol display to be started by the symbol display means is satisfied. Acquisition means;
Accompanying the acquisition of the lottery element by the lottery element acquisition means, a fluctuation pattern for acquiring a fluctuation pattern determination element for determining which one of the plurality of fluctuation patterns defined by the fluctuation pattern definition means is to be selected A determinant acquisition means;
Storage means for memorize the obtained variation pattern determinant by acquired lottery element and the fluctuation pattern determining element acquisition unit by the drawing element acquisition unit,
If the variation pattern determining element is newly stored by the storage means, is the special variation pattern selected by the variation pattern determining means using the new variation pattern determining element before the start condition is satisfied? A variation pattern destination determination means for determining in advance whether or not,
And the operation input receiving unit that receives an operation input,
Meet certain conditions in the case by that determine the constant results in the variation pattern destination determining means is a determination result of said lottery elements special variation pattern is selected are present by the variation pattern determining means If a special game is being executed by the special game execution means, a player participation that executes a player participation type effect that outputs a success or failure result based on the operation input received by the operation input reception means Mold production execution means;
When a success result is output in the player participation type production by the player participation type production execution means, at least after the special game by the special game execution means is completed, winning in the symbol variation display by the symbol display means execution means out JP Koto演 to perform especially Koto演 unloading suggesting what that design in a manner that represents is likely to be stopped and displayed,
If the determination result by the variation pattern destination determination means is a determination result that there is a lottery element for selecting the special variation pattern by the variation pattern determination means, but does not satisfy the specific condition, the variation The variation special effect executing means for executing the special effect in the variation in which the special variation pattern is selected by the pattern determining unit and the symbol variation display is executed;
A gaming machine comprising: In the gaming machine according to claim 1 ,
About the result at the time of winning obtained by the internal lottery execution means by the internal lottery executing means, a winning type defining means for predefining a plurality of winning types including at least a specific winning type;
When a winning result is obtained in the internal lottery execution means by the internal lottery execution means, further comprising a winning type determining means for determining which of a plurality of winning types specified by the winning type specifying means corresponds to,
The player participation type production execution means is:
When the special game is executed in response to the determination that the winning type determination means corresponds to the specific winning type, the player participation type effect is executed assuming that the specific condition is satisfied. A featured gaming machine. In the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2 ,
Satisfies a predetermined condition in the case by that determine the constant results in the variation pattern destination determining means is a determination result of said lottery elements special variation pattern is selected not present by the variation pattern determining means When the special game is executed by the special game executing means, the failure limited game for executing the failure limited player participation type effect that outputs the result of the failure based on the operation input received by the operation input receiving means. A gaming machine, further comprising person-participation-type production execution means.